Mechanical engineering and materials Books

Book SynopsisPublisher's Note: Products purchased from Third Party sellers are not guaranteed by the publisher for quality, authenticity, or access to any online entitlements included with the product.Instant access to the latest geotechnical engineering dataFully updated to include the 2012 International Building Code (IBC), Geotechnical Engineer's Portable Handbook, Second Edition, features a wealth of on-the-job geotechnical and construction related information in a convenient, quick-reference format. This practical resource is filled with essential data, formulas, and guidelines you can access right away. Detailed tables, charts, graphs, and illustrations are included throughout the book for ease of use in the field.Coverage includes: Field exploration LaboratoTable of ContentsPart 1. Geotechnical EngineeringChapter 1. IntroductionChapter 2. Field ExplorationChapter 3. Laboratory TestingChapter 4. Soil and Rock ClassificationChapter 5. Phase RelationshipsChapter 6. Effective Stress and Stress DistributionChapter 7. Shear StrengthChapter 8. Permeability and SeepageChapter 9. Settlement AnalysesChapter 10. Bearing Capacity AnalysesChapter 11. Pavement and Pipeline DesignChapter 12. Expansive SoilChapter 13. Slope StabilityChapter 14. Geotechnical Earthquake EngineeringChapter 15. Erosion AnalysesChapter 16. Retaining WallsChapter 17. DeteriorationChapter 18. FoundationsPart 2. ConstructionChapter 19. Grading and Other Site Improvement MethodsChapter 20. Groundwater and Percolation TestsChapter 21. Excavation, Underpinning, and Field Load TestsChapter 22. GeosyntheticsChapter 23. InstrumentationPart 3. 2012 International Building CodeChapter 24. International Building Code Regulations for SoilsChapter 25. International Building Code Regulations for FoundationsAppendix A. GlossaryAppendix B. Examples of Grading Specifications and Foundation Engineering ReportAppendix C. Percolation Test ProceduresAppendix D. Conversion FactorsAppendix E. Example Problems and SolutionsAppendix F. ReferencesIndex

Read more less

Book SynopsisOption B is a priced contract with a bill of quantities where the risk of carrying out the work at the agreed prices being is borne by the contractor. This document contains all the core and secondary option clauses, the shorter schedule of cost components, and contract data, relevant to an option B contract. Construction Clients' Board endorsement of NEC3 The Construction Clients' Board (formerly Public Sector Clients' Forum) recommends that public sector organisations use the NEC3 contracts when procuring construction. Standardising use of this comprehensive suite of contracts should help to deliver efficiencies across the public sector and promote behaviours in line with the principles of Achieving Excellence in Construction.Table of ContentsSchedule of options Core clauses • 1 General • 2 The Contractor’s main responsibilities • 3 Time • 4 Testing and Defects • 5 Payment • 6 Compensation events • 7 Title • 8 Risks and insurance • 9 Termination Dispute resolution W • Option W1 • Option W2 Secondary option clauses • X1 Price adjustment for inflation • X2 Changes in the law • X3 Multiple currencies • X4 Parent company guarantee • X5 Sectional Completion • X6 Bonus for early Completion • X7 Delay damages • X12 Partnering • X13 Performance bond • X14 Advanced payment to the Contractor • X15 Limitation of the Contractor’s liability for his design to reasonable skill and care • X16 Retention • X17 Low performance damages • X18 Limitation of liability • Y(UK)2 The Housing Grants, Construction and Regeneration Act 1996 • Y(UK)3 The Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 • Z Additional conditions of subcontract Note Options X8 to X11 and Y(UK)1 are not used Schedule of Cost Components Contract Data Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe easy way to shed light on Optics In general terms, optics is the science of light. More specifically, optics is a branch of physics that describes the behavior and properties of light?including visible, infrared, and ultraviolet?and the interaction of light with matter.Table of ContentsIntroduction 1 About This Book 1 Conventions Used in This Book 2 What You’re Not to Read 3 Foolish Assumptions 3 How This Book Is Organized 3 Part I: Getting Up to Speed on Optics Fundamentals 4 Part II: Geometrical Optics: Working with More Than One Ray 4 Part III: Physical Optics: Using the Light Wave 4 Part IV: Optical Instrumentation: Putting Light to Practical Use 4 Part V: Hybrids: Exploring More Complicated Optical Systems 5 Part VI: More Than Just Images: Getting into Advanced Optics 5 Part VII: The Part of Tens 5 Icons Used in This Book 5 Where to Go from Here 6 Part I: Getting Up to Speed on Optics Fundamentals 7 Chapter 1: Introducing Optics, the Science of Light 9 Illuminating the Properties of Light 9 Creating images with the particle property of light 10 Harnessing interference and diffraction with the wave property of light 10 Using Optics to Your Advantage: Basic Applications 11 Expanding Your Understanding of Optics 12 Considering complicated applications 12 Adding advanced optics 13 Paving the Way: Contributions to Optics 13 Chapter 2: Brushing Up on Optics-Related Math and Physics 15 Working with Physical Measurements 15 Refreshing Your Mathematics Memory 16 Juggling variables with algebra 16 Finding lengths and angles with trigonometry 18 Exploring the unknown with basic matrix algebra 21 Reviewing Wave Physics 26 The wave function: Understanding its features and variables 26 Medium matters: Working with mechanical waves 28 Using wavefronts in optics 29 Chapter 3: A Little Light Study: Reviewing Light Basics 31 Developing Early Ideas about the Nature of Light 31 Pondering the particle theory of light 32 Walking through the wave theory of light 32 Taking a Closer Look at Light Waves 33 If light is a wave, what’s waving? Understanding electromagnetic radiation 33 Dealing with wavelengths and frequency: The electromagnetic spectrum 36 Calculating the intensity and power of light 36 Einstein’s Revolutionary Idea about Light: Quanta 37 Uncovering the photoelectric effect and the problem with light waves 38 Merging wave and particle properties: The photon 39 Let There Be Light: Understanding the Three Processes that Produce Light 40 Atomic transitions 40 Accelerated charged particles 41 Matter-antimatter annihilation 42 Introducing the Three Fields of Study within Optics 42 Geometrical optics: Studying light as a collection of rays 42 Physical optics: Exploring the wave property of light 43 Quantum optics: Investigating small numbers of photons 43 Chapter 4: Understanding How to Direct Where Light Goes 45 Reflection: Bouncing Light Off Surfaces 45 Determining light’s orientation 46 Understanding the role surface plays in specular and diffuse reflection 47 Appreciating the practical difference between reflection and scattering 48 Refraction: Bending Light as It Goes Through a Surface 50 Making light slow down: Determining the index of refraction 50 Calculating how much the refracted ray bends: Snell’s law 51 Bouncing light back with refraction: Total internal reflection 52 Varying the refractive index with dispersion 53 Birefringence: Working with two indices of refraction for the same wavelength 54 Diffraction: Bending Light around an Obstacle 55 Part II: Geometrical Optics: Working with More Than One Ray 57 Chapter 5: Forming Images with Multiple Rays of Light 59 The Simplest Method: Using Shadows to Create Images 60 Forming Images Without a Lens: The Pinhole Camera Principle 62 Eyeing Basic Image Characteristics for Optical System Design 63 The type of image created: Real or virtual 63 The orientation of the image relative to the object 63 The size of the image relative to the object 64 Zeroing In on the Focal Point and Focal Length 65 Determining the focal point and length 65 Differentiating real and virtual focal points 66 Chapter 6: Imaging with Mirrors: Bouncing Many Rays Around 69 Keeping it Simple with Flat Mirrors 69 Changing Shape with Concave and Convex Mirrors 70 Getting a handle on the mirror equation and sign conventions 71 Working with concave mirrors 72 Exploring convex mirrors 74 Chapter 7: Imaging with Refraction: Bending Many Rays at the Same Time 77 Locating the Image Produced by a Refracting Surface 78 Calculating where an image will appear 78 Solving single-surface imaging problems 80 Working with more than one refracting surface 83 Looking at Lenses: Two Refracting Surfaces Stuck Close Together 85 Designing a lens: The lens maker’s formula 85 Taking a closer look at convex and concave lenses 88 Finding the image location and characteristics for multiple lenses 89 D’oh, fuzzy again! Aberrations 91 Part III: Physical Optics: Using the Light Wave 95 Chapter 8: Optical Polarization: Describing the Wiggling Electric Field in Light 97 Describing Optical Polarization 97 Focusing on the electric field’s alignment 98 Polarization: Looking at the plane of the electric field 99 Examining the Different Types of Polarization 100 Linear, circular, or elliptical: Following the vector path 100 Random or unpolarized: Looking at changing or mixed states 107 Producing Polarized Light 108 Selective absorption: No passing unless you get in line 108 Scattering off small particles 109 Reflection: Aligning parallel to the surface 110 Birefringence: Splitting in two 111 Chapter 9: Changing Optical Polarization 113 Discovering Devices that Can Change Optical Polarization 113 Dichroic filters: Changing the axis with linear polarizers 114 Birefringent materials: Changing or rotating the polarization state 117 Rotating light with optically active materials 121 Jones Vectors: Calculating the Change in Polarization 121 Representing the polarization state with Jones vectors 121 Jones matrices: Showing how devices will change polarization 124 Matrix multiplication: Predicting how devices will affect incident light 126 Chapter 10: Calculating Reflected and Transmitted Light with Fresnel Equations 131 Determining the Amount of Reflected and Transmitted Light 131 Transverse modes: Describing the orientation of the fields 132 Defining the reflection and transmission coefficients 133 Using more powerful values: Reflectance and transmittance 134 The Fresnel equations: Finding how much incident light is reflected or transmitted 135 Surveying Special Situations Involving Reflection and the Fresnel Equations 136 Striking at Brewster’s angle 137 Reflectance at normal incidence: Coming in at 0 degrees 137 Reflectance at glancing incidence: Striking at 90 degrees 138 Exploring internal reflection and total internal reflection 138 Frustrated total internal reflection: Dealing with the evanescent wave 139 Chapter 11: Running Optical Interference: Not Always a Bad Thing 143 Describing Optical Interference 143 On the fringe: Looking at constructive and destructive interference 144 Noting the conditions required to see optical interference 145 Perusing Practical Interference Devices: Interferometers 146 Wavefront-splitting interferometers 146 Amplitude-splitting interferometers 151 Accounting for Other Amplitude-Splitting Arrangements 154 Thin film interference 154 Newton’s rings 157 Fabry-Perot interferometer 158 Chapter 12: Diffraction: Light’s Bending around Obstacles 161 From Near and Far: Understanding Two Types of Diffraction 162 Defining the types of diffraction 162 Determining which type of diffraction you see 163 Going the Distance: Special Cases of Fraunhofer Diffraction 164 Fraunhofer diffraction from a circular aperture 165 Fraunhofer diffraction from slits 167 Getting Close: Special Cases of Fresnel Diffraction 172 Fresnel diffraction from a rectangular aperture 173 Fresnel diffraction from a circular aperture 174 Fresnel diffraction from a solid disk 175 Diffraction from Fresnel zone plates 175 Part IV: Optical Instrumentation: Putting Light to Practical Use 179 Chapter 13: Lens Systems: Looking at Things the Way You Want to See Them 181 Your Most Important Optical System: The Human Eye 181 Understanding the structure of the human eye 182 Accommodation: Flexing some muscles to change the focus 183 Using Lens Systems to Correct Vision Problems 185 Corrective lenses: Looking at lens shape and optical power 185 Correcting nearsightedness, farsightedness, and astigmatism 186 Enhancing the Human Eye with Lens Systems 190 Magnifying glasses: Enlarging images with the simple magnifier 191 Seeing small objects with the compound microscope 192 Going the distance with the simple telescope 194 Jumping to the big screen: The optical projector 195 Chapter 14: Exploring Light Sources: Getting Light Where You Want It 197 Shedding Light on Common Household Bulbs 198 Popular bulb types and how they work 198 Reading electrical bulb rates 201 Shining More-Efficient Light on the Subject: Light Emitting Diodes 201 Looking inside an LED 202 Adding color with organic light emitting diodes 203 LEDs on display: Improving your picture with semiconductor laser diodes 204 Zeroing in on Lasers 205 Building a basic laser system 206 Comparing lasers to light bulbs 211 Chapter 15: Guiding Light From Here to Anywhere 213 Getting Light in the Guide and Keeping it There: Total Internal Reflection 213 Navigating numerical aperture: How much light can you put in? 214 Examining light guide modes 215 Categorizing Light Guide Types 216 Fiber-optic cables 216 Slab waveguides 220 Putting Light Guides to Work: Common Applications 221 Light pipes 221 Telecommunication links 221 Imaging bundles 224 Part V: Hybrids: Exploring More Complicated Optical Systems 227 Chapter 16: Photography: Keeping an Image Forever 229 Getting an Optical Snapshot of the Basic Camera 230 Lens: Determining what you see 231 Aperture: Working with f-number and lens speed 234 Shutter: Letting just enough light through 236 Recording media: Saving images forever 236 Holography: Seeing Depth in a Flat Surface 237 Seeing in three dimensions 237 Exploring two types of holograms 238 Relating the hologram and the diffraction grating 240 Graduating to 3-D Movies: Depth that Moves! 243 Circular polarization 243 Six-color anaglyph system 244 Shutter glasses 244 Chapter 17: Medical Imaging: Seeing What’s Inside You (No Knives Necessary!) 247 Shining Light into You and Seeing What Comes Out 247 X-rays 248 Optical coherence tomography 250 Endoscopes 251 Reading the Light that Comes Out of You 253 CAT scans 254 PET scans 255 NMR scans 256 MRI scans 257 Chapter 18: Optics Everywhere: Exploring Other Medical, Industrial, and Military Uses 259 Considering Typical Medical Procedures Involving Lasers 259 Removing stuff you don’t want: Tissue ablation 260 Sealing up holes or incisions 263 Purely cosmetic: Doing away with tattoos, varicose veins, and unwanted hair 264 Getting Industrial: Making and Checking Products Out with Optics 265 Monitoring quality control 265 Drilling holes or etching materials 265 Making life easier: Commercial applications 266 Applying Optics in Military and Law Enforcement Endeavors 267 Range finders 267 Target designation 268 Missile defense 268 Night vision systems 269 Thermal vision systems 270 Image processing 270 Chapter 19: Astronomical Applications: Using Telescopes 271 Understanding the Anatomy of a Telescope 272 Gathering the light 272 Viewing the image with an eyepiece 273 Revolutionizing Refracting Telescopes 274 Galilean telescope 275 Kepler’s enhancement 276 Reimagining Telescope Design: Reflecting Telescopes 277 Newtonian 277 Cassegrain 278 Gregorian 279 Hybrid Telescopes: Lenses and Mirrors Working Together 280 Schmidt 280 Maksutov 281 Invisible Astronomy: Looking Beyond the Visible 282 When One Telescope Just Won’t Do: The Interferometer 283 Part VI: More Than Just Images: Getting into Advanced Optics 285 Chapter 20: Index of Refraction, Part 2: You Can Change It! 287 Electro-Optics: Manipulating the Index of Refraction with Electric Fields 287 Dielectric polarization: Understanding the source of the electro-optic effect 288 Linear and quadratic: Looking at the types of electro-optic effects 289 Examining electro-optic devices 293 Acousto-Optics: Changing a Crystal’s Density with Sound 295 The acousto-optic effect: Making a variable diffraction grating 295 Using acousto-optic devices 296 Frequency Conversion: Affecting Light Frequency with Light 297 Second harmonic generation: Doubling the frequency 297 Parametric amplification: Converting a pump beam into a signal beam 298 Sum and difference frequency mixing: Creating long or short wavelengths 299 Chapter 21: Quantum Optics: Finding the Photon 301 Weaving Together Wave and Particle Properties 301 Seeing wave and particle properties of light 302 Looking at wave and particle properties of matter 304 Experimental Evidence: Observing the Dual Nature of Light and Matter 306 Young’s two-slit experiment, revisited 306 Diffraction of light and matter 307 The Mach-Zehnder interferometer 308 Quantum Entanglement: Looking at Linked Photons 308 Spooky action: Observing interacting photons 308 Encryption and computers: Developing technology with linked photons 309 Part VII: The Part of Tens 311 Chapter 22: Ten Experiments You Can Do Without a $1-Million Optics Lab 313 Chromatic Dispersion with Water Spray 313 The Simple Magnifier 314 Microscope with a Marble 314 Focal Length of a Positive Lens with a Magnifying Glass 314 Telescope with Magnifying Glasses 315 Thin Film Interference by Blowing Bubbles 316 Polarized Sunglasses and the Sky 316 Mirages on a Clear Day 317 Spherical Aberration with a Magnifying Glass 317 Chromatic Aberration with a Magnifying Glass 318 Chapter 23: Ten Major Optics Discoveries — and the People Who Made them Possible 319 The Telescope (1610) 319 Optical Physics (Late 1600s) 320 Diffraction and the Wave Theory of Light (Late 1600s) 320 Two-Slit Experiment (Early 1800s) 321 Polarization (Early 1800s) 321 Rayleigh Scattering (Late 1800s) 321 Electromagnetics (1861) 322 Electro-Optics (1875 and 1893) 322 Photon Theory of Light (1905) 322 The Maser (1953) and The Laser (1960) 323 Index 325

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book is a collection of papers from The American Ceramic Society''s 35th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 23-28, 2011. This issue includes papers presented in the Mechanical Behavior and Performance of Ceramics & Composites Symposium on topics such as processing-microstructure properties correlations; fracture mechanics, modeling and testing; tribological properties; applications; and processing.Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi COMPOSITES: FIBERS, MATRICES, INTERFACES, AND APPLICATIONS Oxide Fiber Coatings for Silicon Carbide Ceramic Matrix Composites 3 Emmanuel E. Boakye, Pavel S. Mogilevsky, T. A. Parthasarathy, Randall S. Hay, Michael K. Cinibulk, and M. Ahrens Transmission Electron Microscopy of Rare-Earth Orthophosphate Fiber-Matrix Interphases that Deform by Transformation Plasticity During Fiber Push-Out 15 R. S. Hay, G. E. Fair, E. E. Boakye, P. Mogilevsky, T. A. Parthasarathy, M. Ahrens, and T. J. Godar Processing of Oxide/Oxide Composites for Gas Turbine Applications Based on Braiding Technique (OXITEX) 23 Christian Wilhelmi, Thays Machry, Ralf Knoche, and Dietmar Koch ENVIRONMENTAL EFFECTS OF CERAMICS AND COMPOSITES Relationships Between Fiber Strength, Passive Oxidation and Scale Crystallization Kinetics of Hi-Nicalon-S SiC Fibers 39 R. S. Hay, G. E. Fair, R. Bouffioux, E. Urban, J. Morrow, A. Hart, and M. Wilson FRACTURE MECHANICS, MODELING, AND MECHANICAL TESTING Specimen Stress Equilibrium in Split Hopkinson Pressure Bar Tests of Ceramics at High Strain Rate 55 Jianming Yuan, Jan Ma, and Geoffrey E.B. Tan Residual Stress in Ceramic Zirconia-Porcelain Crowns by Nanoindentation 67 Y. Zhang and J. C. Hanan Design and Development Approach for Gas Turbine Combustion Chambers Made of Oxide Ceramic Matrix Composites 77 Ralf Knoche, Erich Werth, Markus Weth, Jesus Gomez Garcia, Christian Wilhelmi, and Miklos Gerendäs Effects of Preloading on Foreign Object Damage in an N720/Alumina Oxide/Oxide Ceramic Matrix Composite 89 D. Calvin Faucett and Sung R. Choi Frequency and Hold-Time Effects on Durability of Melt-Infiltrated SiC/SiC 101 G. Ojard, Y. Gowayed, G. Morscher, U. Santhosh, J. Ahmad, R. Miller, and R. John Mechanical and Microstructural Characterization of Reaction Bonded Silicon Carbide Processed with Petroleum Coke 111 Rodrigo P. Silva and Celio A. Costa NONDESTRUCTIVE EVALUATION Identification of Damage Modes in Ceramic Matrix Composites by Acoustic Emission Signal Pattern Recognition 123 N. Godin, M. R'Mili, P. Reynaud, G. Fantozzi, and J. Lamon An Indentation Based Non-Destructive Evaluation Technique for Thermal Barrier Coating Spallation Prediction 135 J. M. Tannenbaum, K. Lee, B. S.-J. Kang, and M. A. Alvin Determination of Apparent Porosity Level of Refractory Concrete Using Ultrasonic Pulse Velocity Technique and Image Analysis 151 Anja Terzic , Ljubica Pavlovic , and Vojislav Mitic PROCESSING-MICROSTRUCTURE-PROPERTIES CORRELATIONS Sintering Behavior of Lithium-Titanate Pebbles: Modifications of Microstructure and Pore Morphology 165 D. Mandal, D. Sen, S. Mazumder, MRK Shenoi, S. Ramnathan, and D. Sathiyamoorthy Silicon Carbide Based Sandwich Structures: Processing and Properties 171 Alberto Ortona, Claudio D'Angelo, Simone Pusteria, and Sandra Gianella Chemically Bonded Phosphate Ceramics with Different Fiber Reinforcements 181 H. A. Colorado, C. Hiel, and H. T. Hahn Preceramic-Polymer-Bonded SiC Preforms for High Volume Fraction SiCp/AI Composites 189 Kuljira Sujirote, Kannigar Dateraksa, Sukunthakan Ngernbamrung, Ryan McCuiston, Trinmet Sungkapan, and Jessada Wannasin Novel High Temperature Wound Oxide Ceramic Matrix Composites Manufactured via Freeze Gelation 201 Thays Machry, Christian Wilhelmi, and Dietmar Koch Effect of Reaction Time on Composition and Properties of SiC-Diamond Ceramic Composites 213 S. Salamone, and O. Spriggs Pressureless Sintering of Boron Carbide Using Amorphous Boron and SiC as Additives 223 Celio A. Costa, Victor Manuel, Jose Brant de Campos, and Pedro Augusto de S.L. Cosentino Effect of Reactive Heat Treatment on Properties of AI-Mg-B4C Composites 229 M. K. Aghajanian, A. L. McCormick, and W. M. Waggoner Cohesive Strength of Dry Powders Using Rheology 237 Nicholas Ku, Sara Reynaud, Chuck Rohn, and Rich Haber Effect of Heat Treatment on Thermal Properties of Pitch-Based Carbon Fiber and Pan-Based Carbon Fiber Carbon-Carbon Composites 245 Sardar S. Iqbal, Ralph Dinwiddie, Wallace Porter, Michael Lance, and Peter Filip TRIBOLOGICAL PROPERTIES OF CERAMICS AND COMPOSITES Ceramic Foam/Aluminium Alloy Interpenetrating Composites for Wear Resistance Applications 257 J. Liu, J, Binner, R. Higginson, and C. Munnings An Experimental Study on the Effects of SiC on the Sintering and Mechanical Properties of Cr3C2-NiCr Cermets 271 Ali Ozer, Waltraud M. Kriven, and Yahya Kemal Tur Increasing the Operating Pressure of Gasoline Injection Pumps via Ceramic Sliding Systems 281 C. Pfister, H. Kubach, and U. Spicher Property and Microstructural Correlations to Wear on Reaction Bonded Materials 297 A. L. Marshall and S. Salamone Author Index 305

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book is a collection of papers from The American Ceramic Society''s 35th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 23-28, 2011. This issue includes papers presented in the 8th International Symposium on Solid Oxide Fuel Cells: Materials, Science, and Technology on topics such as Cell and Stack Development; Electrochemical/Mechanical/Thermal Performance; Electrodes; Interconnects; Novel Cell/Stack Design and Processing; and Reliability/Degradation.Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi CELL/STACK DEVELOPMENT Recent Development of SOFC Cell and Stack at NTT 3 Reiichi Chiba, Hiroaki Taguchi, Takeshi Komatsu, Himeko Orui, Kazuhiko Nozawa, Kimitaka Watanabe, Yoshiteru Yoshida, Masayuki Yokoo, Akihiro Miyasaka, Hajime Arai, and Katsuya Hayashi Investigation of the Effects of NiO-ScSZ-Layer Insertion on the Current Collection and Catalytic Properties of ScSZ-based Micro-Tubular SOFC 15 Toshiaki Yamaguchi and Nigel Sammes ELECTROLYTES Effect of Dopants on Ce02 Based Solid State Electrolytes for Intermediate Temperature Electrochemical Devices 23 E. Yu. Pikalova, A. K. Demin, V. G. Bamburov, V. I. Maragou, and P. E. Tsiakaras ELECTRODES Electrochemical Phenomena in MEA Electrodes 37 Mihails Kusnezoff, Nikolai Trofimenko, and Alexander Michaelis The Effect of A-Site Stoichiometry on LSCF Cathode Performance and Stability 61 Jared Templeton, John Hardy, Zigui Lu, and Jeff Stevenson Influence of Operational Parameters on LSCF and LSF Stability 67 Amaia Arregui, Lide M. Rodriguez-Martinez, Stefano Modena, Jan van Herle, Massimo Bertoldi, and Vincenzo M. Sglavo Assessment of the Electrochemical Properties of BSCF and Samarium Doped BSCF Perovskites 77 Keling Zhang, Alex Lassman, Atul Verma, and Prabhakar Singh Role of Sintering Atmosphere on the Stability of LSM-YSZ Composite 89 Manoj Mahapatra and Prabhakar Singh INTERCONNECTS Crofer22 APU in Real SOFC Stacks 101 Qingping Fang, Mario Heinrich, and Christian Wunderlich Assessment of Chromium Evaporation from Chromia and Alumina Forming Alloys 115 Sanjit Bhowmick, Gavin Le, Atul Verma, and Prabhakar Singh Effect of Chromium Doping on the Crystal Structure, Electrical Conductivity and Thermal Expansion of Manganese Cobalt Spinel Oxides 125 Yingjia Liu, Kangli Wang, and Jeffrey W. Fergus Effect of Metallic Interconnect Thickness on its Long-Term Performance in SOFCs 131 Wenning Liu, Xin Sun, Liz Stephens, and Moe Khaleel Characterization of the Conductive Protection Layers on Alloy Interconnect for SOFC 139 Xiaojia Du, Minfang Han, and Ze Lei NOVEL CELL/STACK DESIGN AND PROCESSING Advanced Manufacturing Technology for Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 149 Norbert H. Menzler, Wolfgang Schafbauer, Robert Mücke, Ralf Kauert, Oliver Büchler, Hans Peter Buchkremer, and Detlev Stöver Production of Current Collector-Supported Micro-Tubular Solid Oxide Fuel Cells with Sacrificial Inner Core 161 Ricardo De la Torre, Michèle Casarin, and Vincenzo M. Sglavo RELIABILITY/DEGRADATION Numerical Modeling of Cathode Contact Material Densification 171 Brian J. Koeppel, Wenning Liu, Elizabeth V. Stephens, and Moe A. Khaleel Observations on the Air Electrode-Electrolyte Interface Degradation in Solid Oxide Electrolysis Cells 183 Michael Keane, Atul Verma, and Prabhakar Singh FUEL REFORMING Carbon Dioxide Reforming of Methane for Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 195 Mitsunobu Kawano, Hiroyuki Yoshida, Koji Hashino, and Toru Inagaki Author Index 207

Read more less

Book SynopsisA collection of papers from The American Ceramic Society''s 35th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 23-28, 2011. This issue includes papers presented in the 5th International Symposium on Nanostructured Materials and Nanotechnology on topics such as Nanotubes, Nanorods, Nanowires and other One-dimensional Structures; Nanostructured Membranes, Thin Films, and Functional Coatings; Synthesis, Functionalization and Processing of Nanostructured Materials; and Advanced Applications.Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi NANOMATERIALS FOR PHOTOCATALYSIS, SOLAR, HYDROGEN, AND THERMOELECTRICS Morphology Controlled Electrospinning of V205 Nanofibers and Their Gas Sensing Behavior 3 R. Von Hagen, A. Lepcha, M. Hoffmann, M. Di Biase, and S. Mathur Fabrication of Nanostructured a-Fe2O3 Films for Solar-Driven Hydrogen Generation using Hybrid Heating 11 Bala Vaidhyanathan, Sina Saremi-Yarahmadi, and K. G. Upul Wijayantha NANOSTRUCTURED MEMBRANES, THIN FILMS, AND FUNCTIONAL COATINGS Synthesis and Characterization of Bimetal Decorated Carbon Spheres for Sensing Applications 23 Innocentia V. Sibiya and S. Sinha Ray NANOTUBES AND POLYMER NANOCOMPOSITE TECHNOLOGY Microwave Irradiation of Ruthenium on Nitrogen-Doped Carbon Nanotubes 33 Letlhogonolo F. Mabena, Suprakas Sinha Ray, and Neil J. Coville Amine Functionaiization of Carbon Nanotubes for the Preparation of CNT Based Polylactide Composites-A Comparative Study 43 Sreejarani K. Pillai, James Ramontja, and Suprakas Sinha Ray The Effect of Surface Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes on the Morphology, As Well As Thermal, Thermomechanical, and Crystallization Properties of Polylactide 53 James Ramontja, Suprakas Sinha Ray, Sreejarani K. Pillai, and Adriaan S. Luyt Structure and Properties Multilayered Micro- and Nanocomposite Coatings of Ti-N-Al/Ti-N/Al2O3 69 A. D. Pogrebnjak, V. M. Beresnev, M. VJI'yashenko, D. A. Kolesnikov, A. P. Shypylenko, A. Sh. Kaverina, N. K. Erdybaeva, V. V. Kosyak, P.V. Zukovski, F. F. Komarov, and V. V. Grudnitskii Formation of Nanostructured Carbonitride Layers during Implantation of NiTi 79 Alexander Pogrebnjak, Sergey Bratushka, and Nela Levintant Design and Construction of Complex Nanostructed Al203 Coating for Protective Applications 91 P. Manivasakan, V. Rajendran, P. R. Rauta, B. B. Sahu, and B. K. Panda Microwave Assisted Synthesis and Characterization of Silver/Gold Nanoparticles Loaded Carbon Nanotubes 103 Charity Maepa, Sreejarani K. Pillai, Suprakas Sinha Ray, and Leskey Cele The Comparison in the Efficiency in Nitrogen Doped Carbon Nanotubes and Undoped Carbon Nanotubes in the Anchoring of Silver Nanoparticles 113 K. Mphahlele, S. Sinha Ray, M. S. Onyango, and S. D. Mhlanga SYNTHESIS, FUNCTIONALIZATION, AND PROCESSING OF NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIAL Synthesis of Submicron-Size CaB6 Powders using Various Boron Sources 127 A. Akkoyunlu, R. Koc, J. Mawdsley, and D. Carter Synthesis of Submicron/Nano Sized CaB6 from Carbon Coated Precursors 137 Naved Siddiqui, Rasit Koc, Jennifer Mawdsley, and David Carter An Easy Two-Step Microwave Assisted Synthesis of SnO2/CNT Hybrids 151 Sarah C. Motshekga, Sreejarani K. Pillai, Suprakas Sinha Ray, Kalala Jalama, and Rui W. M Krause Grain Size Reduction and Surface Modification Effect in Polycrystalline Y2O3 Subject to High Pressure Processing 157 Jafar F. Al-Sharab, Bernard H. Kear, S. Deutsch, and Stephen D. Tse Synthesis of Nano-Size TiB2 Powders Using Carbon Coated Precursors 165 Pi. Duddukuri, R. Koc, J. Mawdsley, and D. Carter High Temperature Diffraction Study of In-Situ Crystallization of TiO2 Photocatalysts 177 I. M. Low, W. K. Pang, V. De La Prida, V. Vega, J. A. Kimpton, and M. lonescu Author Index 187

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book is a collection of papers from The American Ceramic Society''s 35th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 23-28, 2011. This issue includes papers presented in the 5th International Symposium on Advanced Processing and Manufacturing Technologies for Structural and Multifunctional Materials and Systems on topics such as Design-Oriented Manufacturing and Novel Forming and Sintering. Papers from a special session held in honor of Katsutoshi Komeya of Yokohama National University, Japan are also included.Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi Seeds Innovation and Bearing Applications of Silicon Nitride Ceramics 1 Katsutoshi Komeya Comparison of Microwave and Conventionally Sintered Yttria Doped Zirconia Ceramics and Hydroxyapatite-Zirconia Nanocomposites 17 Mark R. Towler, Stuart Hampshire, Colin J. Reidy, Declan J. Curran, and Thomas J. Fleming Recent Developments in High Thermal Conductivity Silicon Nitride Ceramics 27 You Zhou, Kiyoshi Hirao, Hideki Hyuga, and Dai Kusano Microstructure Maps for Unidirectional Freezing of Particle Suspensions 35 Rainer Oberacker, Thomas Waschkies, and Michael J. Hoffmann Interactions of Si3N4-Based Ceramics in Water Environment Under Sub-Critical Conditions 45 Pavol Sajgalik, Dagmar Galuskovä, Miroslav Hnatko, and Dusan Galusek Smart Recycling of Composite Materials 59 Makio Naito, Hiroya Abe and Akira Kondo, Masashi Miura and Norifumi Isu, and Takahiro Ohmura High Thermal Conductivity and High Strength Sintered Reaction - Bonded Silicon Nitride Ceramics Fabricated by Using Low Grade Si Powder 67 Dai Kusano, Shigeru Adachi, Gen Tanabe, Hideki Hyuga, You Zhou, and Kiyoshi Hirao Electrical Conductive CNT-Dispersed Si3N4 Ceramics with Double Percolation Structure 77 Sara Yoshio, Junichi Tatami, Toru Wakihara, Tomohiro Yamakawa, Katsutoshi Komeya, and Takeshi Meguro Fabrication of CNT-Dispersed Si3N4 Ceramics by Mechanical Dry Mixing Technique 83 Atsushi Hashimoto, Sara Yoshio, Junichi Tatami, Hiromi Nakano, Toru Wakihara, Katsutoshi Komeya, and Takeshi Meguro Joining of Silicon Nitride Long Pipe by Local Heating 89 Mikinori Hotta, Naoki Kondo, and Hideki Kita Joining of Silicon Nitride with Pyrex Glass by Microwave Local Heating 93 Naoki Kondo, Hideki Hyuga, Mikinori Hotta, Hideki Kita, and Kiyoshi Hirao Mechanical Properties of Chemical Bonded Phosphate Ceramics with Fly Ash as Filler 97 H. A. Colorado, C. Daniel, C. Hiel, H. T. Hahn, and J. M. Yang Ceramics Micro Processing of Photonic Crystals: Geometrical Patterning of Tiania Dispersed Polymer for Terahertz Wave Control 109 Soshu Kirihara, Satoko Tasaki, Toshiki Niki, and Noritoshi Ohta Intergranular Properties and Structural Fractal Analysis of BaTiO3-Ceramics Doped by Rare Earth Additives 121 V. V. Mitic, V. Pavlovic, V. Paunovic, J. Purenovic, Lj. Kocic, S. Jankovic, I. Antolovic, and D. Rancic Development of Numerical Method for Evaluating Microstructural Fracture in Smart Materials 133 Hisashi Serizawa, Tsuyoshi Hajima, Seigo Tomiyama, and Hidekazu Murakawa Fabrication of Ceramic Dental Crowns by Using Stereolithography and Powder Sintering Process 141 Satoko Tasaki, Soshu Kirihara, and Taiji Soumura Large-Sized Structural Ceramic Manufacturing by the Shaping of Thixotropic Slurries 147 Eugene Medvedovski Oriented Alumina Ceramics Prepared from Colloidal Processing in Magnetic Field 159 Satoshi Tanaka, Atsushi Makiya, and Keizo Uematsu Densification Mechanisms of Yttria-Stabilized Zirconia Based Amorphous Powders by Electric Current Assisted Sintering Process 165 Tatsuo Kumagai and Kazuhiro Hongo Microstructure Control of Si3N4 Ceramics Using Nanocomposite Particles Prepared by Dry Mechanical Treatment 177 Junichi Tatami, Makoto Noguchi, Hiromi Nakano, Toru Wakihara, Katsutoshi Komeya, and Takeshi Meguro Author Index 183

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book is a collection of papers from The American Ceramic Society''s 35th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 23-28, 2011. This issue includes papers presented in the Thermal Management Materials and Technologies; Advanced Sensor Technology; Geopolymers; and Computational Design, Modeling, and Simulation of Ceramics and Composites symposia.Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi GEOPOLYMERS AND OTHER INORGANIC POLYMERS Effect of External and Internal Calcium in Fly Ash on Geopolymer Formation 3 Kiatsuda Somna and Walairat Bumrongjaroen Synthesis and Thermal Properties of Fly-Ash Based Geopolymer Pastes and Mortars 17 Ch. Panagiotopoulou, A. Asprogerakas, G. Kakali, and S. Tsivilis Mechanical Response of Discontinuous Filament PVA Fiber Reinforced Geopolymers 29 Benjamin Varela and Jeffrey W. Rogers Microwave Enhanced Drying and Firing of Geopolymers 35 Tyler A Gubb, Inessa Baranova, Shawn M. Allan, Morgana L. Fall, Holly S. Shulman, and Waltraud M. Kriven Geopolymerization of Red Mud and Rice Husk Ash and Potentials of the Resulting Geopolymeric Products for Civil Infrastructure Applications 45 Jian He and Guoping Zhang The Effect of Addition of Pozzolanic Tuff on Geopolymers 53 Hani Khoury, Islam Al Dabsheh, Faten Slaty, Yousef Abu Salha, Hubert Rahier, Muayad Esaifan, and Jan Wastiels Bottom Ash-Based Geopolymer Materials: Mechanical and Environmental Properties 71 R. Onori, J. Will, A. Hoppe, A. Polettini, R. Pomi, and A. R. Boccaccini Production of Geopolymers from Untreated Kaolinite 83 H. Rahier, M. Esaifan, I. Aldabsheh, F. Slatyi, H. Khoury, and J. Wastiels Phosphate Geopolymers 91 Arun S. Wagh THERMAL MANAGEMENT MATERIALS AND TECHNOLOGIES 3-Dimensional Modeling of Graphitic Foam Heat Sink 107 Adrian Bradu and Khairul Alam Enhancement of Heat Capacity of Molten Salt Eutectics using Inorganic Nanoparticles for Solar Thermal Energy Applications 119 Donghyun Shin and Debjyoti Banerjee Enhancement of Heat Capacity of Nitrate Salts using Mica Nanoparticles 127 Seunghwan Jung and Debjyoti Banerjee Enhanced Viscosity of Aqueous Silica Nanofluids 139 Byeongnam Jo and Debjyoti Banerjee Pumping Power of 50/50 Mixtures of Ethylene Glycol/Water Containing SiC Nanoparticles 147 Jules L. Routbort, Dileep Singh, Elena V. Timofeeva, Wenhua Yu, David M. France, and Roger K. Smith COMPUTATIONAL DESIGN Characterization of Non Uniform Veneer Layer Thickness Distribution on Curved Substrate Zirconia Ceramics using X-Ray Micro-Tomography 155 M. Allahkarami, H. A. Bale, and J. C. Hanan Computational Study of Wave Propagation in Second-Order Nonlinear Piezoelectric Media 165 David A. Hopkins and George A. Gazonas Impact of Material and Architecture Model Parameters on the Failure of Woven CMCS via the Multiscale Generalized Method of Cells 175 Kuang Liu, Aditi Chattopadhyay, and Steven M. Arnold Kinetic Monte Carlo Simulation of Oxygen and Cation Diffusion in Yttria-Stabilized Zirconia 193 Brian Good ADVANCED SENSOR TECHNOLOGY Nano-Calorimeter Platform for Explosive Sensing 209 Seok-Won Kang, Nicholas Niedbalski, Mathew R Lane, and Debjyoti Banerjee Polyaniline-Silica Nanocomposite: Application in Electrocatalysis of Acetylthiocholine 221 Prem C. Pandey, Vandana Singh, and S. Kumari Electrochemical Sensing of Dopamine over Polyindole-Composite Electrode 235 Prem C. Pandey, Dheeraj S. Chauhan, and S. Kumari Author Index 245

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis issue contains a collection of papers presented at the 71st Conference on Glass Problems, October 19-20, 2010 at The Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio. Topics include glass melting, glass science - defects, safety, refractories, recycling, controls, and raw materials.Table of ContentsForeword ix Preface xi Acknowledgments xiii GLASS MELTING. Recent Developments of Batch and Cullet Preheating in Europe—Practical Experiences and Implications 3 Philipp Zippe Oxy-Fuel Conversion Reduces Fuel Consumption in Fiberglass Melting 19 John Rossi, Michael Habel, Kevin Lièvre, Xiaoyi He, and Matthew Watson Solar Glass Melting 33 Matthias Lindig Integrated Air Quality Control System for Float Glass Furnace 39 Michael Cheng and Nathan Blanton GLASS SCIENCE, DEFECTS, AND SAFETY. Heavy Metal Issues—In and Out of Glass 53 C. Philip Ross A Look at the Chemical Strengthening Process: Alkali Aluminosilicate Glasses vs. Soda-Lime Glass 61 Sinue Gomez, Matthew J. Dejneka, Adam J. Ellison, and Katherine R. Rossington Studying Bubble Glass Defects That are Caused by Refractory Materials 67 Jiri Ullrich and Erik Muijsenberg Analysis of Cord and Stones in Glass 81 Henry Dimmick, Neal Nichols, and Gary Smay "Cat Scratch" Cord Dispersal 87 Les Gaskell Tools Used to Improve Operational Safety in Johns Manville Glass Plants 95 Noel Camp REFRACTORIES AND RECYCLING. Extra Clear Glass Refractory Selection: A Follow Up 107 L. Massard, M. Gaubil, and J. Poiret Refractory Issues and Glass Processing and Preventative Solutions 115 Paul Myers Fuel Savings with High Emissivity Coatings 125 Tom Kleeb and Bill Fausey Regenerator Temperature Modeling for Proper Refractory Selection 137 Elias Carrillo and Mathew Wheeler Thinking Green: Recycling in the Refractory Industry 157 Werner Odreitz and Matt Wheeler Recycling of Post-Consumer Glass: Energy Savings, CO2 Emission Reduction, Effects on Glass Quality and Glass Melting 167 Ruud Beerkens, Goos Kers, and Engelbert van Santen Characterization and Improvement of Gob Delivery Systems Braden McDermott, Xu Ding, and Jonathan Simon CONTROLS AND RAW MATERIALS. Model Based Process Control for Glass Furnace Operation 205 Piet van Santen, Leo Huisman and Sander van Deelen Taking Full Benefit of Oxygen Sensors and Automatic Control 215 Peter Hemmann Flue Gas Treatment in the Glass Industry: Dry Process and Calcium-based Sorbents 225 Amandine Gambin and Xavier Pettiau To Wet or Not to Wet—That is the Question—Part A 235 Douglas H. Davis and Christopher J. Hoyle A Historical Perspective on Silica and the Glass Industry in the USA 249 Paul F. Guttmann Author Index 261

Read more less

Book SynopsisDym, Little and Orwin''s Engineering Design: A Project-Based Introduction, 4th Edition gets students actively involved with conceptual design methods and project management tools. The book helps students acquire design skills as they experience the activity of design by doing design projects. It is equally suitable for use in project-based first-year courses, formal engineering design courses, and capstone project courses.Table of ContentsFOREWORD x PREFACE xi ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xvi PART I INTRODUCTION 1 CHAPTER 1 ENGINEERING DESIGN What does it mean to design something? Is engineering design different from other kinds of design? 3 1.1 Where and when do engineers design? 3 1.2 A basic vocabulary for engineering design 7 1.3 Learning and doing engineering design 12 1.4 Managing engineering design projects 14 1.5 Notes 15 CHAPTER 2 DEFINING A DESIGN PROCESS AND A CASE STUDY How do I do engineering design? Can you show me an example? 16 2.1 The design process as a process of questioning 16 2.2 Describing and prescribing a design process 19 2.3 Informing a design process 24 2.4 Case study: Design of a stabilizer for microlaryngeal surgery 27 2.5 Illustrative design examples 34 2.6 Notes 35 PART II THE DESIGN PROCESS AND DESIGN TOOLS 37 CHAPTER 3 PROBLEM DEFINITION: DETAILING CUSTOMER REQUIREMENTS What does the client require of this design? 39 3.1 Clarifying the initial problem statement 40 3.2 Framing customer requirements 41 3.3 Revised problem statements: Public statements of the design project 43 3.4 Designing an arm support for a CP-afflicted student 44 3.5 Notes 46 CHAPTER 4 PROBLEM DEFINITION: CLARIFYING THE OBJECTIVES What is this design intended to achieve? 47 4.1 Clarifying a client’s objectives 47 4.2 Measurement issues in ordering and evaluating objectives 53 4.3 Rank ordering objectives with pairwise comparison charts 54 4.4 Developing metrics to measure the achievement of objectives 57 4.5 Objectives and metrics for the Danbury arm support 62 4.6 Notes 66 CHAPTER 5 PROBLEM DEFINITION: IDENTIFYING CONSTRAINTS What are the limits for this design problem? 67 5.1 Identifying and setting the client’s limits 67 5.2 Displaying and using constraints 68 5.3 Constraints for the Danbury arm support 69 5.4 Notes 70 CHAPTER 6 PROBLEM DEFINITION: ESTABLISHING FUNCTIONS How do I express a design’s functions in engineering terms? 71 6.1 Establishing functions 71 6.2 Functional analysis: Tools for establishing functions 73 6.3 Design specifications: Specifying functions, features, and behavior 81 6.4 Functions for the Danbury arm support 88 6.5 Notes 91 CHAPTER 7 CONCEPTUAL DESIGN: GENERATING DESIGN ALTERNATIVES How do I generate or create feasible designs? 92 7.1 Generating the “design space,” a space of engineering designs 92 7.2 Navigating, expanding, and contracting design spaces 99 7.3 Generating designs for the Danbury arm support 101 7.4 Notes 105 CHAPTER 8 CONCEPTUAL DESIGN: EVALUATING DESIGN ALTERNATIVES AND CHOOSING A DESIGN Which design should I choose? Which design is “best”? 106 8.1 Applying metrics to objectives: Selecting the preferred design 106 8.2 Evaluating designs for the Danbury arm support 111 8.3 Notes 113 PART III DESIGN COMMUNICATION 115 CHAPTER 9 COMMUNICATING DESIGNS GRAPHICALLY Here’s my design; can you make it? 117 9.1 Engineering sketches and drawings speak to many audiences 117 9.2 Sketching 119 9.3 Fabrication specifications: The several forms of engineering drawings 122 9.4 Fabrication specifications: The devil is in the details 127 9.5 Final notes on drawings 129 9.6 Notes 130 CHAPTER 10 PROTOTYPING AND PROOFING THE DESIGN Here’s my design; how well does it work? 131 10.1 Prototypes, models, and proofs of concept 132 10.2 Building models and prototypes 135 10.3 Notes 141 CHAPTER 11 COMMUNICATING DESIGNS ORALLY AND IN WRITING How do we let our client know about our solutions? 142 11.1 General guidelines for technical communication 143 11.2 Oral presentations: Telling a crowd what’s been done 145 11.3 The project report: Writing for the client, not for history 150 11.4 Final report elements for the Danbury arm support 155 11.5 Notes 158 PART IV DESIGN MODELING, ENGINEERING ECONOMICS, AND DESIGN USE 159 CHAPTER 12 MATHEMATICAL MODELING IN DESIGN Math and physics are very much part of the design process! 161 12.1 Some mathematical habits of thought for design modeling 162 12.2 Some mathematical tools for design modeling 163 12.3 Modeling a battery-powered payload cart 177 12.4 Design modeling of a ladder rung 186 12.5 Preliminary design of a ladder rung 193 12.6 Closing remarks on mathematics, physics, and design 196 12.7 Notes 196 CHAPTER 13 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS IN DESIGN How much is this going to cost? 197 13.1 Cost estimation: How much does this particular design cost? 197 13.2 The time value of money 201 13.3 Closing considerations on engineering and economics 204 13.4 Notes 204 CHAPTER 14 DESIGN FOR PRODUCTION, USE, AND SUSTAINABILITY What other factors influence the design process? 205 14.1 Design for production: Can this design be made? 206 14.2 Design for use: How long will this design work? 209 14.3 Design for sustainability: What about the environment? 215 14.4 Notes 218 PART V DESIGN TEAMS, TEAM MANAGEMENT, AND ETHICS IN DESIGN 221 CHAPTER 15 DESIGN TEAM DYNAMICS We can do this together, as a team! 223 15.1 Forming design teams 223 15.2 Constructive conflict: Enjoying a good fight 227 15.3 Leading design teams 229 15.4 Notes 231 CHAPTER 16 MANAGING A DESIGN PROJECT What do you want? When do you want it? How much are we going to spend? 232 16.1 Getting started: Establishing the managerial needs of a project 232 16.2 Tools for managing a project’s scope 234 16.3 The team calendar: A tool for managing a project’s schedule 241 16.4 The budget: A tool for managing a project’s spending 243 16.5 Monitoring and controlling projects: Measuring a project’s progress 245 16.6 Managing the end of a project 248 16.7 Notes 249 CHAPTER 17 ETHICS IN DESIGN Design is not just a technical matter 250 17.1 Ethics: Understanding obligations 250 17.2 Codes of ethics: What are our professional obligations? 252 17.3 Obligations may start with the client . . . 255 17.4 . . . But what about the public and the profession? 256 17.5 On engineering practice and the welfare of the public 261 17.6 Ethics: Always a part of engineering practice 263 17.7 Notes 263 APPENDICES 264 APPENDIX A PRACTICAL ASPECTS OF PROTOTYPING 264 APPENDIX B PRACTICAL ASPECTS OF ENGINEERING DRAWING 279 APPENDIX C EXERCISES 300 REFERENCES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY 309 INDEX 315

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book is an updated in-depth study and explanation of avionics as applied to civil aircraft. Substantial new content covers changes in avionics technology, software, and system safety. Ian Moir and Allan Seabridge are both highly experienced in the aircraft industry and are also involved in devising and delivering training courses.Trade Review“In summary, this book has been researched, prepared and produced to a very high standard. It will provide a wealth of information for students in FE/HE, and will serve as an excellent resource throughout the industry.” (Aerospace, 1 December 2014) Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xix Series Preface xxi Preface to Second Edition xxii Preface to First Edition xxiii Acknowledgements xxv List of Abbreviations xxvi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Advances since 2003 1 1.2 Comparison of Boeing and Airbus Solutions 2 1.3 Outline of Book Content 2 1.3.1 Enabling Technologies and Techniques 3 1.3.2 Functional Avionics Systems 4 1.3.3 The Flight Deck 4 1.4 The Appendices 4 2 Avionics Technology 7 2.1 Introduction 7 2.2 Avionics Technology Evolution 8 2.2.1 Introduction 8 References 77 3 Data Bus Networks 79 3.1 Introduction 79 3.2 Digital Data Bus Basics 80 References 118 4 System Safety 119 4.1 Introduction 119 4.2 Flight Safety 120 4.2.1 Introduction 120 4.2.2 Flight Safety Overview 120 4.2.3 Accident Causes 124 References 157 5 Avionics Architectures 159 5.1 Introduction 159 5.2 Avionics Architecture Evolution 159 5.2.1 Overview of Architecture Evolution 159 5.2.2 Distributed Analogue Architecture 161 5.2.3 Distributed Digital Architecture 162 5.2.4 Federated Digital Architecture 164 5.2.5 Integrated Modular Avionics 166 5.2.6 Open System Standards 169 5.3 Avionic Systems Domains 169 5.3.1 The Aircraft as a System of Systems 169 5.3.2 ATA Classification 171 5.4 Avionics Architecture Examples 172 5.4.1 The Manifestations of IMA 172 5.4.2 The Airbus A320 Avionics Architecture 173 5.4.3 The Boeing 777 Avionics Architecture 174 5.4.4 Honeywell EPIC Architecture 179 5.4.5 The Airbus A380 and A 350 180 5.4.6 The Boeing 787 184 5.5 IMA Design Principles 188 5.6 The Virtual System 189 5.6.1 Introduction to Virtual Mapping 189 5.6.2 Implementation Example: Airbus A 380 191 5.6.3 Implementation Example: Boeing 787 193 5.7 Partitioning 194 5.8 IMA Fault Tolerance 195 5.8.1 Fault Tolerance Principles 195 5.8.2 Data Integrity 196 5.8.3 Platform Health Management 197 5.9 Network Definition 197 5.10 Certification 198 5.10.1 IMA Certification Philosophy 198 5.10.2 Platform Acceptance 199 5.10.3 Hosted Function Acceptance 200 5.10.4 Cost of Change 200 5.10.5 Configuration Management 201 5.11 IMA Standards 201 References 203 6 Systems Development 205 6.1 Introduction 205 6.1.1 Systems Design 205 6.1.2 Development Processes 206 6.2 System Design Guidelines 206 6.2.1 Key Agencies and Documentation 206 6.2.2 Design Guidelines and Certification Techniques 207 6.2.3 Guidelines for Development of Civil Aircraft and Systems – SAE ARP 4754A 208 6.2.4 Guidelines and Methods for Conducting the Safety Assessment – SAE ARP 4761 208 6.2.5 Software Considerations – RTCA DO-178B 209 6.2.6 Hardware Development – RTCA DO- 254 209 6.2.7 Integrated Modular Avionics – RTCA DO- 297 209 6.2.8 Equivalence of US and European Specifications 210 6.3 Interrelationship of Design Processes 210 6.3.1 Functional Hazard Assessment (FHA) 210 6.3.2 Preliminary System Safety Assessment (PSSA) 212 6.3.3 System Safety Assessment (SSA) 213 6.3.4 Common Cause Analysis (CCA) 213 6.4 Requirements Capture and Analysis 213 6.4.1 Top-Down Approach 214 6.4.2 Bottom-Up Approach 214 6.4.3 Requirements Capture Example 215 6.5 Development Processes 217 6.5.1 The Product Life-Cycle 217 6.5.2 Concept Phase 218 6.5.3 Definition Phase 219 6.5.4 Design Phase 220 6.5.5 Build Phase 221 6.5.6 Test Phase 222 6.5.7 Operate Phase 223 6.5.8 Disposal or Refurbish Phase 223 6.6 Development Programme 224 6.6.1 Typical Development Programme 224 6.6.2 ‘V’ Diagram 226 6.7 Extended Operations Requirements 226 6.7.1 ETOPS Requirements 226 6.7.2 Equipment Requirements 228 6.8 ARINC Specifications and Design Rigour 229 6.8.1 ARINC 400 Series 229 6.8.2 ARINC 500 Series 229 6.8.3 ARINC 600 Series 229 6.8.4 ARINC 700 Series 230 6.8.5 ARINC 800 Series 230 6.8.6 ARINC 900 Series 230 6.9 Interface Control 231 6.9.1 Introduction 231 6.9.2 Interface Control Document 231 6.9.3 Aircraft-Level Data-Bus Data 231 6.9.4 System Internal Data-Bus Data 233 6.9.5 Internal System Input/Output Data 233 6.9.6 Fuel Component Interfaces 233 References 233 7 Electrical Systems 235 7.1 Electrical Systems Overview 235 7.1.1 Introduction 235 7.1.2 Wider Development Trends 236 7.1.3 Typical Civil Electrical System 238 7.2 Electrical Power Generation 239 7.2.1 Generator Control Function 239 7.2.2 DC System Generation Control 240 7.2.3 AC Power Generation Control 242 7.3 Power Distribution and Protection 248 7.3.1 Electrical Power System Layers 248 7.3.2 Electrical System Configuration 248 7.3.3 Electrical Load Protection 250 7.3.4 Power Conversion 253 7.4 Emergency Power 254 7.4.1 Ram Air Turbine 255 7.4.2 Permanent Magnet Generators 256 7.4.3 Backup Systems 257 7.4.4 Batteries 258 7.5 Power System Architectures 259 7.5.1 Airbus A320 Electrical System 259 7.5.2 Boeing 777 Electrical System 261 7.5.3 Airbus A380 Electrical System 264 7.5.4 Boeing 787 Electrical System 265 7.6 Aircraft Wiring 268 7.6.1 Aircraft Breaks 269 7.6.2 Wiring Bundle Definition 270 7.6.3 Wiring Routing 271 7.6.4 Wiring Sizing 272 7.6.5 Aircraft Electrical Signal Types 272 7.6.6 Electrical Segregation 274 7.6.7 The Nature of Aircraft Wiring and Connectors 274 7.6.8 Used of Twisted Pairs and Quads 275 7.7 Electrical Installation 276 7.7.1 Temperature and Power Dissipation 278 7.7.2 Electromagnetic Interference 278 7.7.3 Lightning Strikes 280 7.8 Bonding and Earthing 280 7.9 Signal Conditioning 282 7.9.1 Signal Types 282 7.9.2 Signal Conditioning 283 7.10 Central Maintenance Systems 284 7.10.1 Airbus A330/340 Central Maintenance System 285 7.10.2 Boeing 777 Central Maintenance Computing System 288 References 290 Further Reading 290 8 Sensors 291 8.1 Introduction 291 8.2 Air Data Sensors 292 8.2.1 Air Data Parameters 292 8.2.2 Pressure Sensing 292 8.2.3 Temperature Sensing 292 8.2.4 Use of Pressure Data 294 8.2.5 Pressure Datum Settings 295 8.2.6 Air Data Computers (ADCs) 297 8.2.7 Airstream Direction Detectors 299 8.2.8 Total Aircraft Pitot-Static System 300 8.3 Magnetic Sensors 301 8.3.1 Introduction 301 8.3.2 Magnetic Field Components 302 8.3.3 Magnetic Variation 303 8.3.4 Magnetic Heading Reference System 305 8.4 Inertial Sensors 306 8.4.1 Introduction 306 8.4.2 Position Gyroscopes 306 8.4.3 Rate Gyroscopes 306 8.4.4 Accelerometers 308 8.4.5 Inertial Reference Set 309 8.4.6 Platform Alignment 312 8.4.7 Gimballed Platform 315 8.4.8 Strap-Down System 317 8.5 Combined Air Data and Inertial 317 8.5.1 Introduction 317 8.5.2 Evolution of Combined Systems 317 8.5.3 Boeing 777 Example 319 8.5.4 ADIRS Data-Set 320 8.5.5 Further System Integration 320 8.6 Radar Sensors 323 8.6.1 Radar Altimeter 323 8.6.2 Weather Radar 324 References 327 9 Communications and Navigation Aids 329 9.1 Introduction 329 9.1.1 Introduction and RF Spectrum 329 9.1.2 Equipment 331 9.1.3 Antennae 332 9.2 Communications 332 9.2.1 Simple Modulation Techniques 332 9.2.2 HF Communications 335 9.2.3 VHF Communications 337 9.2.4 SATCOM 339 9.2.5 Air Traffic Control (ATC) Transponder 342 9.2.6 Traffic Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) 345 9.3 Ground-Based Navigation Aids 347 9.3.1 Introduction 347 9.3.2 Non-Directional Beacon 348 9.3.3 VHF Omni-Range 348 9.3.4 Distance Measuring Equipment 348 9.3.5 TACAN 350 9.3.6 VOR/TAC 350 9.4 Instrument Landing Systems 350 9.4.1 Overview 350 9.4.2 Instrument Landing System 351 9.4.3 Microwave Landing System 354 9.4.4 GNSS Based Systems 354 9.5 Space-Based Navigation Systems 354 9.5.1 Introduction 354 9.5.2 Global Positioning System 355 9.5.3 GLONASS 358 9.5.4 Galileo 359 9.5.5 COMPASS 359 9.5.6 Differential GPS 360 9.5.7 Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS/SBAS) 360 9.5.8 Local Area Augmentation System (LAAS/LBAS) 360 9.6 Communications Control Systems 362 References 363 10 Flight Control Systems 365 10.1 Principles of Flight Control 365 10.1.1 Frame of Reference 365 10.1.2 Typical Flight Control Surfaces 366 10.2 Flight Control Elements 368 10.2.1 Interrelationship of Flight Control Functions 368 10.2.2 Flight Crew Interface 370 10.3 Flight Control Actuation 371 10.3.1 Conventional Linear Actuation 372 10.3.2 Linear Actuation with Manual and Autopilot Inputs 372 10.3.3 Screwjack Actuation 373 10.3.4 Integrated Actuation Package 374 10.3.5 FBW and Direct Electrical Link 376 10.3.6 Electrohydrostatic Actuation (EHA) 377 10.3.7 Electromechanical Actuation (EMA) 378 10.3.8 Actuator Applications 379 10.4 Principles of Fly-By-Wire 379 10.4.1 Fly-By-Wire Overview 379 10.4.2 Typical Operating Modes 380 10.4.3 Boeing and Airbus Philosophies 382 10.5 Boeing 777 Flight Control System 383 10.5.1 Top Level Primary Flight Control System 383 10.5.2 Actuator Control Unit Interface 384 10.5.3 Pitch and Yaw Channel Overview 386 10.5.4 Channel Control Logic 387 10.5.5 Overall System Integration 389 10.6 Airbus Flight Control Systems 389 10.6.1 Airbus FBW Evolution 389 10.6.2 A320 FBW System 391 10.6.3 A330/340 FBW System 393 10.6.4 A380 FBW System 394 10.7 Autopilot Flight Director System 396 10.7.1 Autopilot Principles 396 10.7.2 Interrelationship with the Flight Deck 398 10.7.3 Automatic Landing 400 10.8 Flight Data Recorders 401 10.8.1 Principles of Flight Data Recording 401 10.8.2 Data Recording Environments 403 10.8.3 Future Requirements 403 References 404 11 Navigation Systems 405 11.1 Principles of Navigation 405 11.1.1 Basic Navigation 405 11.1.2 Navigation using Ground-Based Navigation Aids 407 11.1.3 Navigation using Air Data and Inertial Navigation 408 11.1.4 Navigation using Global Navigation Satellite Systems 410 11.1.5 Flight Technical Error – Lateral Navigation 411 11.1.6 Flight Technical Error – Vertical Navigation 412 11.2 Flight Management System 413 11.2.1 Principles of Flight Management Systems (FMS) 413 11.2.2 FMS Crew Interface – Navigation Display 414 11.2.3 FMS Crew Interface – Control and Display Unit 417 11.2.4 FMS Functions 420 11.2.5 FMS Procedures 421 11.2.6 Standard Instrument Departure 423 11.2.7 En-Route Procedures 423 11.2.8 Standard Terminal Arrival Routes 424 11.2.9 ILS Procedures 427 11.2.10 Typical FMS Architecture 427 11.3 Electronic Flight Bag 427 11.3.1 EFB Functions 427 11.3.2 EFB Implementation 429 11.4 Air Traffic Management 430 11.4.1 Aims of Air Traffic Management 430 11.4.2 Communications, Navigation, Surveillance 430 11.4.3 NextGen 431 11.4.4 Single European Sky ATM Research (SESAR) 432 11.5 Performance-Based Navigation 433 11.5.1 Performance-Based Navigation Definition 433 11.5.2 Area Navigation (RNAV) 434 11.5.3 Required Navigation Performance (RNP) 438 11.5.4 Precision Approaches 440 11.6 Automatic Dependent Surveillance – Broadcast 442 11.7 Boeing and Airbus Implementations 442 11.7.1 Boeing Implementation 442 11.7.2 Airbus Implementation 444 11.8 Terrain Avoidance Warning System (TAWS) 444 References 447 Historical References (in Chronological Order) 447 12 Flight Deck Displays 449 12.1 Introduction 449 12.2 First Generation Flight Deck: the Electromagnetic Era 450 12.2.1 Embryonic Primary Flight Instruments 450 12.2.2 The Early Pioneers 451 12.2.3 The ‘Classic’ Electromechanical Flight Deck 453 12.3 Second Generation Flight Deck: the Electro-Optic Era 455 12.3.1 The Advanced Civil Flight Deck 455 12.3.2 The Boeing 757 and 767 456 12.3.3 The Airbus A320, A330 and A 340 457 12.3.4 The Boeing 747-400 and 777 458 12.3.5 The Airbus A 380 460 12.3.6 The Boeing 787 461 12.3.7 The Airbus A 350 462 12.4 Third Generation: the Next Generation Flight Deck 463 12.4.1 Loss of Situational Awareness in Adverse Operational Conditions 463 12.4.2 Research Areas 463 12.4.3 Concepts 464 12.5 Electronic Centralised Aircraft Monitor (ECAM) System 465 12.5.1 ECAM Scheduling 465 12.5.2 ECAM Moding 465 12.5.3 ECAM Pages 466 12.5.4 Qantas Flight QF 32 466 12.5.5 The Boeing Engine Indicating and Crew Alerting System (EICAS) 468 12.6 Standby Instruments 468 12.7 Head-Up Display Visual Guidance System (HVGS) 469 12.7.1 Introduction to Visual Guidance Systems 469 12.7.2 HVGS on Civil Transport Aircraft 470 12.7.3 HVGS Installation 470 12.7.4 HVGS Symbology 471 12.8 Enhanced and Synthetic Vision Systems 473 12.8.1 Overview 473 12.8.2 EVS, EFVS and SVS Architecture Diagrams 474 12.8.3 Minimum Aviation System Performance Standard (MASPS) 474 12.8.4 Enhanced Vision Systems (EVS) 474 12.8.5 Enhanced Flight Vision Systems (EFVS) 478 12.8.6 Synthetic Vision Systems (SVS) 481 12.8.7 Combined Vision Systems 484 12.9 Display System Architectures 486 12.9.1 Airworthiness Regulations 486 12.9.2 Display Availability and Integrity 486 12.9.3 Display System Functional Elements 487 12.9.4 Dumb Display Architecture 488 12.9.5 Semi-Smart Display Architecture 490 12.9.6 Fully Smart (Integrated) Display Architecture 490 12.10 Display Usability 491 12.10.1 Regulatory Requirements 491 12.10.2 Display Format and Symbology Guidelines 492 12.10.3 Flight Deck Geometry 492 12.10.4 Legibility: Resolution, Symbol Line Width and Sizing 494 12.10.5 Colour 494 12.10.6 Ambient Lighting Conditions 496 12.11 Display Technologies 498 12.11.1 Active Matrix Liquid Crystal Displays (AMLCD) 499 12.11.2 Plasma Panels 501 12.11.3 Organic Light-Emitting Diodes (O-LED) 501 12.11.4 Electronic Paper (e-paper) 502 12.11.5 Micro-Projection Display Technologies 503 12.11.6 Head-Up Display Technologies 504 12.11.7 Inceptors 505 12.12 Flight Control Inceptors 506 12.12.1 Handling Qualities 507 12.12.2 Response Types 507 12.12.3 Envelope Protection 508 12.12.4 Inceptors 508 References 509 13 Military Aircraft Adaptations 511 13.1 Introduction 511 13.2 Avionic and Mission System Interface 512 13.2.1 Navigation and Flight Management 515 13.2.2 Navigation Aids 516 13.2.3 Flight Deck Displays 517 13.2.4 Communications 518 13.2.5 Aircraft Systems 518 13.3 Applications 519 13.3.1 Green Aircraft Conversion 519 13.3.2 Personnel, Material and Vehicle Transport 521 13.3.3 Air-to-Air Refuelling 521 13.3.4 Maritime Patrol 522 13.3.5 Airborne Early Warning 528 13.3.6 Ground Surveillance 528 13.3.7 Electronic Warfare 530 13.3.8 Flying Classroom 530 13.3.9 Range Target/Safety 530 Reference 531 Further Reading 531 Appendices 533 Introduction to Appendices 533 Appendix A: Safety Analysis – Flight Control System 534 A. 1 Flight Control System Architecture 534 A. 2 Dependency Diagram 535 A. 3 Fault Tree Analysis 537 Appendix B: Safety Analysis – Electronic Flight Instrument System 539 B. 1 Electronic Flight Instrument System Architecture 539 B. 2 Fault Tree Analysis 540 Appendix C: Safety Analysis – Electrical System 543 C. 1 Electrical System Architecture 543 C. 2 Fault Tree Analysis 543 Appendix D: Safety Analysis – Engine Control System 546 D. 1 Factors Resulting in an In-Flight Shut Down 546 D. 2 Engine Control System Architecture 546 D. 3 Markov Analysis 548 Simplified Example (all failure rates per flight hour) 549 Index 551

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis is the first book on adaptive aeroservoelasticity and it presents the nonlinear and recursive techniques for adaptively controlling the uncertain aeroelastic dynamics Covers both linear and nonlinear control methods in a comprehensive mannerMathematical presentation of adaptive control concepts is rigorousSeveral novel applications of adaptive control presented here are not to be found in other literature on the topicMany realistic design examples are covered, ranging from adaptive flutter suppression of wings to the adaptive control of transonic limit-cycle oscillationsTable of ContentsAbout the Author xv Series Editor’s Preface xvii Preface xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Aeroservoelasticity 1 1.2 Unsteady Aerodynamics 4 1.3 Linear Feedback Design 7 1.4 Parametric Uncertainty and Variation 11 1.5 Adaptive Control Design 13 1.5.1 Adaptive Control Laws 15 1.6 Organization 20 References 21 2 Linear Control Systems 23 2.1 Notation 23 2.2 Basic Control Concepts 23 2.3 Input–Output Representation 26 2.3.1 Gain and Stability 26 2.3.2 Small Gain Theorem 27 2.4 Input–Output Linear Systems 28 2.4.1 Laplace Transform and Transfer Function 30 2.5 Loop Shaping of Linear Control Systems 33 2.5.1 Nyquist Theorem 34 2.5.2 Gain and Phase Margins 36 2.5.3 Loop Shaping for Single Variable Systems 38 2.5.4 Singular Values 40 2.5.5 Multi-variable Robustness Analysis: Input–Output Model 42 2.6 State-Space Representation 42 2.6.1 State-Space Theory of Linear Systems 43 2.6.2 State Feedback by Eigenstructure Assignment 49 2.6.3 Linear Observers and Output Feedback Compensators 50 2.7 Stochastic Systems 52 2.7.1 Ergodic Processes 57 2.7.2 Filtering of Random Noise 59 2.7.3 Wiener Filter 60 2.7.4 Kalman Filter 61 2.8 Optimal Control 65 2.8.1 Euler–Lagrange Equations 65 2.8.2 Linear, Quadratic Optimal Control 67 2.9 Robust Control Design by LQG/LTR Synthesis 71 2.10 H2/H∞ Design 77 2.10.1 H2 Design Procedure 79 2.10.2 H∞ Design Procedure 80 2.11 𝜇-Synthesis 81 2.11.1 Linear Fractional Transformation 83 References 86 3 Aeroelastic Modelling 87 3.1 Structural Model 88 3.1.1 Statics 88 3.1.2 Dynamics 91 3.1.3 Typical Wing Section 93 3.2 Aerodynamic Modelling Concepts 98 3.2.1 Governing Equations for Unsteady Flow 99 3.2.2 Full-Potential Equation 100 3.2.3 Transonic Small-Disturbance Equation 104 3.3 Baseline Aerodynamic Model 106 3.3.1 Integral Equation Formulation 108 3.3.2 Subsonic Unsteady Aerodynamics 109 3.3.3 Supersonic Unsteady Aerodynamics 114 3.4 Preliminary Aeroelastic Modelling Concepts 115 3.5 Ideal Flow Model for Typical Section 120 3.6 Transient Aerodynamics of Typical Section 125 3.7 State-Space Model of the Typical Section 126 3.8 Generalized Aeroelastic Plant 128 References 135 4 Active Flutter Suppression 139 4.1 Single Degree-of-Freedom Flutter 141 4.2 Bending-Torsion Flutter 146 4.3 Active Suppression of Single Degree-of-Freedom Flutter 147 4.4 Active Flutter Suppression of Typical Section 153 4.4.1 Open-Loop Flutter Analysis 154 4.5 Linear Feedback Stabilization 157 4.5.1 Pole-Placement Regulator Design 157 4.5.2 Observer Design 160 4.5.3 Robustness of Compensated System 162 4.6 Active Flutter Suppression of Three-Dimensional Wings 164 References 168 5 Self-Tuning Regulation 171 5.1 Introduction 171 5.2 Online Plant Identification 172 5.2.1 Least-Squares Parameter Estimation 172 5.2.2 Least-Squares Method with Exponential Forgetting 174 5.2.3 Projection Algorithm 174 5.2.4 Autoregressive Identification 175 5.3 Design Methods for Stochastic Self-Tuning Regulators 176 5.4 Aeroservoelastic Applications 176 References 180 6 Nonlinear Systems Analysis and Design 181 6.1 Introduction 181 6.2 Preliminaries 182 6.2.1 Existence and Uniqueness of Solution 183 6.2.2 Expanded Solution 184 6.3 Stability in the Sense of Lyapunov 185 6.3.1 Local Linearization about Equilibrium Point 187 6.3.2 Lyapunov Stability Theorem 189 6.3.3 LaSalle Invariance Theorem 192 6.4 Input–Output Stability 192 6.4.1 Hamilton–Jacobi Inequality 193 6.4.2 Input-State Stability 194 6.5 Passivity 195 6.5.1 Positive Real Transfer Matrix 196 6.5.2 Stability of Passive Systems 198 6.5.3 Feedback Design for Passive Systems 200 References 201 7 Nonlinear Oscillatory Systems and Describing Functions 203 7.1 Introduction 203 7.2 Absolute Stability 205 7.2.1 Popov Stability Criteria 207 7.2.2 Circle Criterion 207 7.3 Describing Function Approximation 210 7.4 Applications to Aeroservoelastic Systems 212 7.4.1 Nonlinear and Uncertain Aeroelastic Plant 213 References 216 8 Model Reference Adaptation of Aeroservoelastic Systems 217 8.1 Lyapunov-Like Stability of Non-autonomous Systems 218 8.1.1 Uniform Ultimate Boundedness 219 8.1.2 Barbalat’s Lemma 220 8.1.3 LaSalle–Yoshizawa Theorem 220 8.2 Gradient-Based Adaptation 223 8.2.1 Least-Squared Error Adaptation 225 8.3 Lyapunov-Based Adaptation 225 8.3.1 Nonlinear Gain Evolution 228 8.3.2 MRAS for Single-Input Systems 231 8.4 Aeroservoelastic Applications 233 8.4.1 Reference Aeroelastic Model 234 8.4.2 Adaptive Flutter Suppression of Typical Section 236 8.4.3 Adaptive Stabilization of Flexible Fighter Aircraft 241 References 254 9 Adaptive Backstepping Control 255 9.1 Introduction 255 9.2 Integrator Backstepping 256 9.2.1 A Motivating Example 257 9.3 Aeroservoelastic Application 263 Reference 264 10 Adaptive Control of Uncertain Nonlinear Systems 265 10.1 Introduction 265 10.2 Integral Adaptation 266 10.2.1 Extension to Observer-Based Feedback 268 10.2.2 Modified Integral Adaptation with Observer 269 10.3 Model Reference Adaptation of Nonlinear Plant 273 10.4 Robust Model Reference Adaptation 275 10.4.1 Output-Feedback Design 285 10.4.2 Adaptive Flutter Suppression of a Three-Dimensional Wing 288 References 294 11 Adaptive Transonic Aeroservoelasticity 295 11.1 Steady Transonic Flow Characteristics 296 11.2 Unsteady Transonic Flow Characteristics 299 11.2.1 Thin Airfoil with Oscillating Flap 300 11.2.2 Supercritical Airfoil Oscillating in Pitch 308 11.3 Modelling for Transonic Unsteady Aerodynamics 310 11.3.1 Indicial Method 311 11.3.2 Volterra–Wiener Method 312 11.3.3 Describing Function Method 313 11.4 Transonic Aeroelastic Plant 316 11.5 Adaptive Control of Control-Surface Nonlinearity 317 11.5.1 Transonic Flutter Mechanism 319 11.6 Adaptive Control of Limit-Cycle Oscillation 322 References 330 Appendix A Analytical Solution for Ideal Unsteady Aerodynamics 331 A.1 Pure Heaving Oscillation 335 A.2 Küssner–Schwarz Solution for General Oscillation 336 References 337 Appendix B Solution to Possio’s Integral Equation for Subsonic, Unsteady Aerodynamics 339 B.1 Dietze’s Iterative Solution 340 B.2 Analytical Solution by Fettis 341 B.3 Closed-Form Solution 344 References 345 Appendix C Flutter Analysis of Modified DAST-ARW1 Wing 347 References 357 Index 359

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis updated and expanded edition of the bestselling textbook provides a comprehensive introduction to the methods and theory of nonlinear finite element analysis.Table of ContentsForeword xxi Preface xxiii List of Boxes xxvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Nonlinear Finite Elements in Design 1 1.2 Related Books and a Brief History of Nonlinear Finite Elements 4 1.3 Notation 7 1.4 Mesh Descriptions 9 1.5 Classification of Partial Differential Equations 13 1.6 Exercises 17 2 Lagrangian and Eulerian Finite Elements in One Dimension 19 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Governing Equations for Total Lagrangian Formulation 21 2.3 Weak Form for Total Lagrangian Formulation 28 2.4 Finite Element Discretization in Total Lagrangian Formulation 34 2.5 Element and Global Matrices 40 2.6 Governing Equations for Updated Lagrangian Formulation 51 2.7 Weak Form for Updated Lagrangian Formulation 53 2.8 Element Equations for Updated Lagrangian Formulation 55 2.10 Weak Forms for Eulerian Mesh Equations 68 2.11 Finite Element Equations 69 2.12 Solution Methods 72 2.13 Summary 74 2.14 Exercises 75 3 Continuum Mechanics 77 3.1 Introduction 77 3.2 Deformation and Motion 78 3.3 Strain Measures 95 3.4 Stress Measures 104 3.5 Conservation Equations 111 3.6 Lagrangian Conservation Equations 123 3.7 Polar Decomposition and Frame-Invariance 130 3.8 Exercises 143 4 Lagrangian Meshes 147 4.1 Introduction 147 4.2 Governing Equations 148 4.3 Weak Form: Principle of Virtual Power 152 4.4 Updated Lagrangian Finite Element Discretization 158 4.5 Implementation 168 4.6 Corotational Formulations 194 4.7 Total Lagrangian Formulation 203 4.8 Total Lagrangian Weak Form 206 4.9 Finite Element Semidiscretization 209 4.10 Exercises 225 5 Constitutive Models 227 5.1 Introduction 227 5.2 The Stress–Strain Curve 228 5.3 One-Dimensional Elasticity 233 5.4 Nonlinear Elasticity 237 5.5 One-Dimensional Plasticity 254 5.6 Multiaxial Plasticity 262 5.7 Hyperelastic–Plastic Models 281 5.8 Viscoelasticity 292 5.9 Stress Update Algorithms 294 5.10 Continuum Mechanics and Constitutive Models 314 5.11 Exercises 328 6 Solution Methods and Stability 329 6.1 Introduction 329 6.2 Explicit Methods 330 6.3 Equilibrium Solutions and Implicit Time Integration 337 6.4 Linearization 358 6.5 Stability and Continuation Methods 375 6.6 Numerical Stability 391 6.7 Material Stability 407 6.8 Exercises 415 7 Arbitrary Lagrangian Eulerian Formulations 417 7.1 Introduction 417 7.2 ALE Continuum Mechanics 419 7.3 Conservation Laws in ALE Description 426 7.4 ALE Governing Equations 428 7.5 Weak Forms 429 7.6 Introduction to the Petrov–Galerkin Method 433 7.7 Petrov–Galerkin Formulation of Momentum Equation 442 7.8 Path-Dependent Materials 445 7.9 Linearization of the Discrete Equations 457 7.10 Mesh Update Equations 460 7.11 Numerical Example: An Elastic–Plastic Wave Propagation Problem 468 7.12 Total ALE Formulations 471 7.13 Exercises 475 8 Element Technology 477 8.1 Introduction 477 8.2 Element Performance 479 8.3 Element Properties and Patch Tests 487 8.4 Q4 and Volumetric Locking 496 8.5 Multi-Field Weak Forms and Elements 501 8.6 Multi-Field Quadrilaterals 514 8.7 One-Point Quadrature Elements 518 8.8 Examples 527 8.9 Stability 531 8.10 Exercises 533 9 Beams and Shells 535 9.1 Introduction 535 9.2 Beam Theories 537 9.3 Continuum-Based Beam 540 9.4 Analysis of the CB Beam 551 9.5 Continuum-Based Shell Implementation 563 9.6 CB Shell Theory 578 9.7 Shear and Membrane Locking 584 9.8 Assumed Strain Elements 589 9.9 One-Point Quadrature Elements 592 9.10 Exercises 595 10 Contact-Impact 597 10.1 Introduction 597 10.2 Contact Interface Equations 598 10.3 Friction Models 609 10.4 Weak Forms 614 10.5 Finite Element Discretization 624 10.6 On Explicit Methods 638 11 EXtended Finite Element Method (XFEM) 643 11.1 Introduction 643 11.2 Partition of Unity and Enrichments 647 11.3 One-Dimensional XFEM 648 11.4 Multi-Dimension XFEM 656 11.5 Weak and Strong Forms 660 11.6 Discrete Equations 662 11.7 Level Set Method 668 11.8 The Phantom Node Method 670 11.9 Integration 673 11.10 An Example of XFEM Simulation 675 11.11 Exercise 678 12 Introduction to Multiresolution Theory 681 12.1 Motivation: Materials are Structured Continua 681 12.2 Bulk Deformation of Microstructured Continua 685 12.3 Generalizing Mechanics to Bulk Microstructured Continua 686 12.4 Multiscale Microstructures and the Multiresolution Continuum Theory 696 12.5 Governing Equations for MCT 699 12.6 Constructing MCT Constitutive Relationships 701 12.7 Basic Guidelines for RVE Modeling 705 12.8 Finite Element Implementation of MCT 710 12.9 Numerical Example 712 12.10 Future Research Directions of MCT Modeling 718 12.11 Exercises 719 13 Single-Crystal Plasticity 721 13.1 Introduction 721 13.2 Crystallographic Description of Cubic and Non-Cubic Crystals 723 13.3 Atomic Origins of Plasticity and the Burgers Vector in Single Crystals 726 13.4 Defining Slip Planes and Directions in General Single Crystals 729 13.5 Kinematics of Single Crystal Plasticity 735 13.6 Dislocation Density Evolution 740 13.7 Stress Required for Dislocation Motion 742 13.8 Stress Update in Rate-Dependent Single-Crystal Plasticity 743 13.9 Algorithm for Rate-Dependent Dislocation-Density Based Crystal Plasticity 745 13.10 Numerical Example: Localized Shear and Inhomogeneous Deformation 747 13.11 Exercises 750 Appendix 1 Voigt Notation 751 Appendix 2 Norms 757 Appendix 3 Element Shape Functions 761 Appendix 4 Euler Angles From Pole Figures 767 Appendix 5 Example of Dislocation-Density Evolutionary Equations 771 Glossary 777 References 781 Index 795

Read more less

Book SynopsisCovering classical aerodynamic theories and applications made possible by computational aerodynamics, this book provides a discussion on lift and drag from an overall dynamical approach, and after stating the governing Navier-Stokes equation, covers potential flows and panel method.Trade Review“The book ‘is aimed to be a comprehensive textbook’: the classical subject matter, including the transition and stability theory in Chapter 9, would be a useful addition to the literature of any undergraduate or graduate student; the computational sections contain little in terms of fundamentals of numerics but, accepting that useful computational results are the focus, results are presented for several applications that would be of interest to many aerodynamicists.” (The Aeronautical Journal, 3 February 2015)Table of ContentsSeries Preface xv Preface xvii Acknowledgements xxi 1 Introduction to Aerodynamics and Atmosphere 1 1.1 Motivation and Scope of Aerodynamics 1 1.2 Conservation Principles 4 1.2.1 Conservation Laws and Reynolds Transport Theorem (RTT) 4 1.2.2 Application of RTT: Conservation of Linear Momentum 6 1.3 Origin of Aerodynamic Forces 6 1.3.1 Momentum Integral Theory: Real Fluid Flow 8 1.4 Flow in Accelerating Control Volumes: Application of RTT 9 1.5 Atmosphere and Its Role in Aerodynamics 11 1.5.1 Von Kármán Line 11 1.5.2 Structure of Atmosphere 11 1.5.3 Armstrong Line or Limit 12 1.5.4 International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) and Other Atmospheric Details 13 1.5.5 Property Variations in Troposphere and Stratosphere 15 1.6 Static Stability of Atmosphere 17 Bibliography 20 2 Basic Equations of Motion 21 2.1 Introduction 21 2.1.1 Compressibility of Fluid Flow 22 2.2 Conservation Principles 23 2.2.1 Flow Description Method: Eulerian and Lagrangian Approaches 23 2.2.2 The Continuity Equation: Mass Conservation 24 2.3 Conservation of Linear Momentum: Integral Form 25 2.4 Conservation of Linear Momentum: Differential Form 26 2.4.1 General Stress System in a Deformable Body 26 2.5 Strain Rate of Fluid Element in Flows 28 2.5.1 Kinematic Interpretation of Strain Tensor 29 2.6 Relation between Stress and Rate of Strain Tensors in Fluid Flow 32 2.7 Circulation and Rotationality in Flows 35 2.8 Irrotational Flows and Velocity Potential 36 2.9 Stream Function and Vector Potential 37 2.10 Governing Equation for Irrotational Flows 38 2.11 Kelvin’s Theorem and Irrotationality 40 2.12 Bernoulli’s Equation: Relation of Pressure and Velocity 41 2.13 Applications of Bernoulli’s Equation: Air Speed Indicator 42 2.13.1 Aircraft Speed Measurement 43 2.13.2 The Pressure Coefficient 44 2.13.3 Compressibility Correction for Air Speed Indicator 44 2.14 Viscous Effects and Boundary Layers 46 2.15 Thermodynamics and Reynolds Transport Theorem 47 2.16 Reynolds Transport Theorem 48 2.17 The Energy Equation 49 2.17.1 The Steady Flow Energy Equation 51 2.18 Energy Conservation Equation 52 2.19 Alternate Forms of Energy Equation 54 2.20 The Energy Equation in Conservation Form 55 2.21 Strong Conservation and Weak Conservation Forms 55 2.22 Second Law of Thermodynamics and Entropy 56 2.23 Propagation of Sound and Mach Number 60 2.24 One-Dimensional Steady Flow 61 2.25 Normal Shock Relation for Steady Flow 62 2.26 Rankine--Hugoniot Relation 64 2.27 Prandtl or Meyer Relation 65 2.28 Oblique ShockWaves 69 2.29 Weak Oblique Shock 71 2.30 Expansion of Supersonic Flows 74 Bibliography 76 3 Theoretical Aerodynamics of Potential Flows 77 3.1 Introduction 77 3.2 Preliminaries of Complex Analysis for 2D Irrotational Flows: Cauchy--Riemann Relations 78 3.2.1 Cauchy’s Residue Theorem 81 3.2.2 Complex Potential and Complex Velocity 81 3.3 Elementary Singularities in Fluid Flows 81 3.3.1 Superposing Solutions of Irrotational Flows 83 3.4 Blasius’ Theorem: Forces and Moment for Potential Flows 90 3.4.1 Force Acting on a Vortex in a Uniform Flow 92 3.4.2 Flow Past a Translating and Rotating Cylinder: Lift Generation Mechanism 94 3.4.3 Prandtl’s Limit on Maximum Circulation and its Violation 97 3.4.4 Pressure Distribution on Spinning and Translating Cylinder 98 3.5 Method of Images 99 3.6 Conformal Mapping: Use of Cauchy--Riemann Relation 101 3.6.1 Laplacian in the Transformed Plane 102 3.6.2 Relation between Complex Velocity in Two Planes 104 3.6.3 Application of Conformal Transformation 104 3.7 Lift Created by Jukowski Airfoil 111 3.7.1 Kutta Condition and Circulation Generation 113 3.7.2 Lift on Jukowski Airfoil 114 3.7.3 Velocity and Pressure Distribution on Jukowski Airfoil 116 3.8 Thin Airfoil Theory 116 3.8.1 Thin Symmetric Flat Plate Airfoil 119 3.8.2 Aerodynamic Centre and Centre of Pressure 122 3.8.3 The Circular Arc Airfoil 124 3.9 General Thin Airfoil Theory 129 3.10 Theodorsen Condition for General Thin Airfoil Theory 134 Bibliography 135 4 Finite Wing Theory 137 4.1 Introduction 137 4.2 Fundamental Laws of Vortex Motion 137 4.3 Helmholtz’s Theorems of Vortex Motion 138 4.4 The Bound Vortex Element 140 4.5 Starting Vortex Element 140 4.6 Trailing Vortex Element 141 4.7 Horse Shoe Vortex 142 4.8 The Biot-Savart Law 142 4.8.1 Biot-Savart Law for Simplified Cases 144 4.9 Theory for a Finite Wing 146 4.9.1 Relation between Spanwise Loading and Trailing Vortices 146 4.10 Consequence of Downwash: Induced Drag 147 4.11 Simple Symmetric Loading: Elliptic Distribution 149 4.11.1 Induced Drag for Elliptic Loading 151 4.11.2 Modified Elliptic Load Distribution 152 4.11.3 The Downwash for Modified Elliptic Loading 153 4.12 General Loading on a Wing 154 4.12.1 Downwash for General Loading 155 4.12.2 Induced Drag on a Finite Wing for General Loading 156 4.12.3 Load Distribution for Minimum Drag 157 4.13 Asymmetric Loading: Rolling and Yawing Moment 157 4.13.1 Rolling Moment (𝐿𝑅) 157 4.13.2 Yawing Moment (N) 159 4.13.3 Effect of Aspect Ratio on Lift Curve Slope 159 4.14 Simplified Horse Shoe Vortex 161 4.15 Applications of Simplified Horse Shoe Vortex System 162 4.15.1 Influence of Downwash on Tailplane 162 4.15.2 Formation-flight of Birds 163 4.15.3 Wing-in-Ground Effect 165 4.16 Prandtl’s Lifting Line Equation or the Monoplane Equation 167 Bibliography 169 5 Panel Methods 171 5.1 Introduction 171 5.2 Line Source Distribution 172 5.2.1 Perturbation Velocity Components due to Source Distribution 174 5.3 Panel Method due to Hess and Smith 176 5.3.1 Calculation of Influence Coefficients 180 5.4 Some Typical Results 183 Bibliography 188 6 Lifting Surface, Slender Wing and Low Aspect Ratio Wing Theories 189 6.1 Introduction 189 6.2 Green’s Theorems and Their Applications to Potential Flows 190 6.2.1 Reciprocal Theorem 192 6.3 Irrotational External Flow Field due to a Lifting Surface 192 6.3.1 Large Aspect Ratio Wings 197 6.3.2 Wings of Small Aspect Ratio 199 6.4 Slender Wing Theory 201 6.5 Spanwise Loading 205 6.6 Lift on Delta or Triangular Wing 206 6.6.1 Low Aspect Ratio Wing Aerodynamics and Vortex Lift 207 6.7 Vortex Breakdown 214 6.7.1 Types of Vortex Breakdown 216 6.8 Slender Body Theory 218 Bibliography 221 7 Boundary Layer Theory 223 7.1 Introduction 223 7.2 Regular and Singular Perturbation Problems in Fluid Flows 224 7.3 Boundary Layer Equations 225 7.3.1 Conservation of Mass 226 7.3.2 The 𝑥-Momentum Equation 226 7.3.3 The 𝑦-Momentum Equation 227 7.3.4 Use of Boundary Layer Equations 229 7.4 Boundary Layer Thicknesses 230 7.4.1 Boundary Layer Displacement Thickness 231 7.4.2 Boundary Layer Momentum Thickness 232 7.5 Momentum Integral Equation 233 7.6 Validity of Boundary Layer Equation and Separation 235 7.7 Solution of Boundary Layer Equation 237 7.8 Similarity Analysis 238 7.8.1 Zero Pressure Gradient Boundary Layer or Blasius Profile 243 7.8.2 Stagnation Point or the Hiemenz Flow 244 7.8.3 Flat Plate Wake at Zero Angle of Attack 245 7.8.4 Two-dimensional Laminar Jet 247 7.8.5 Laminar Mixing Layer 250 7.9 Use of Boundary Layer Equation in Aerodynamics 252 7.9.1 Differential Formulation of Boundary Layer Equation 253 7.9.2 Use of Momentum Integral Equation 254 7.9.3 Pohlhausen’s Method 254 7.9.4 Thwaite’s Method 257 Bibliography 258 8 Computational Aerodynamics 259 8.1 Introduction 259 8.2 A Model Dynamical Equation 260 8.3 Space--Time Resolution of Flows 263 8.3.1 Spatial Scales in Turbulent Flows and Direct Numerical Simulation 264 8.3.2 Computing Unsteady Flows: Dispersion Relation Preserving (DRP) Methods 265 8.3.3 Spectral or Numerical Amplification Factor 266 8.4 An Improved Orthogonal Grid Generation Method for Aerofoil 275 8.5 Orthogonal Grid Generation 279 8.5.1 Grid Generation Algorithm 281 8.6 Orthogonal Grid Generation for an Aerofoil with Roughness Elements 284 8.7 Solution of Navier--Stokes Equation for Flow Past AG24 Aerofoil 287 8.7.1 Grid Smoothness vs Deviation from Orthogonality 290 Bibliography 291 9 Instability and Transition in Aerodynamics 295 9.1 Introduction 295 9.2 Temporal and Spatial Instability 298 9.3 Parallel Flow Approximation and Inviscid Instability Theorems 299 9.3.1 Inviscid Instability Mechanism 300 9.4 Viscous Instability of Parallel Flows 301 9.4.1 Temporal and Spatial Amplification of Disturbances 303 9.5 Instability Analysis from the Solution of the Orr--Sommerfeld Equation 304 9.5.1 Local and Total Amplification of Disturbances 306 9.5.2 Effects of the Mean Flow Pressure Gradient 308 9.5.3 Transition Prediction Based on Stability Calculation: 𝑒𝑁 Method 312 9.5.4 Effects of FST 314 9.5.5 Distinction between Controlled and Uncontrolled Excitations 315 9.6 Transition in Three-Dimensional Flows 318 9.7 Infinite Swept Wing Flow 320 9.8 Attachment Line Flow 321 9.9 Boundary Layer Equations in the Transformed Plane 322 9.10 Simplification of Boundary Layer Equations in the Transformed Plane 324 9.11 Instability of Three-Dimensional Flows 325 9.11.1 Effects of Sweep-back and Cross Flow Instability 326 9.12 Linear Viscous Stability Theory for Three-Dimensional Flows 328 9.12.1 Temporal Instability of Three-dimensional Flows 329 9.12.2 Spatial Instability of Three-dimensional Flows 330 9.13 Experimental Evidence of Instability on Swept Wings 332 9.14 Infinite Swept Wing Boundary Layer 334 9.15 Stability of the Falkner--Skan--Cooke Profile 337 9.16 Stationary Waves over Swept Geometries 340 9.17 Empirical Transition Prediction Method for Three-Dimensional Flows 340 9.17.1 Streamwise Transition Criterion 341 9.17.2 Cross Flow Transition Criteria 341 9.17.3 Leading Edge Contamination Criterion 343 Bibliography 343 10 Drag Reduction: Analysis and Design of Airfoils 347 10.1 Introduction 347 10.2 Laminar Flow Airfoils 350 10.2.1 The Drag Bucket of Six-Digit Series Aerofoils 352 10.2.2 Profiling Modern Laminar Flow Aerofoils 353 10.3 Pressure Recovery of Some Low Drag Airfoils 358 10.4 Flap Operation of Airfoils for NLF 361 10.5 Effects of Roughness and Fixing Transition 362 10.6 Effects of Vortex Generator or Boundary Layer Re-Energizer 364 10.7 Section Characteristics of Various Profiles 364 10.8 A High Speed NLF Aerofoil 365 10.9 Direct Simulation of Bypass Transitional Flow Past an Airfoil 369 10.9.1 Governing Equations and Formulation 370 10.9.2 Results and Discussion 371 Bibliography 378 11 Direct Numerical Simulation of 2D Transonic Flows around Airfoils 381 11.1 Introduction 381 11.2 Governing Equations and Boundary Conditions 382 11.3 Numerical Procedure 384 11.4 Some Typical Results 387 11.4.1 Validation of Methodologies for Compressible Flow Calculations and Shock Capturing 387 11.4.2 Computing Strong Shock Cases 396 11.4.3 Unsteadiness of Compressible Flows 396 11.4.4 Creation of Rotational Effects 396 11.4.5 Strong Shock and Entropy Gradient 401 11.4.6 Lift and Drag Calculation 404 Bibliography 406 12 Low Reynolds Number Aerodynamics 409 12.1 Introduction 409 12.2 Micro-air Vehicle Aerodynamics 412 12.3 Governing Equations in Inertial and Noninertial Frames 413 12.3.1 Pressure Solver 415 12.3.2 Proof of Equation (12.17) 416 12.3.3 Distinction between Low and High Reynolds Number Flows 418 12.3.4 Validation Studies of Computations 420 12.4 Flow Past an AG24 Airfoil at Low Reynolds Numbers 425 Bibliography 442 13 High Lift Devices and Flow Control 445 13.1 Introduction 445 13.1.1 High Lift Configuration 446 13.2 Passive Devices: Multi-Element Airfoils with Slats and Flaps 449 13.2.1 Optimization of Flap Placement and Settings 450 13.2.2 Aerodynamic Data of GA(W)-1 Airfoil Fitted with Fowler Flap 453 13.2.3 Physical Explanation of Multi-element Aerofoil Operation 455 13.2.4 Vortex Generator 457 13.2.5 Induced Drag and Its Alleviation 461 13.2.6 Theoretical Analysis of Induced Drag 463 13.2.7 Fuselage Drag Reduction 464 13.2.8 Instability of Flow over Nacelle 465 13.3 Flow Control by Plasma Actuation: High Lift Device and Drag Reduction 465 13.3.1 Control of Bypass Transitional Flow Past an Aerofoil by Plasma Actuation 466 13.4 Governing Equations for Plasma 468 13.4.1 Suzen et al.’s Model 470 13.4.2 Orlov’s Model 471 13.4.3 Spatio-temporal Lumped-element Circuit Model 472 13.4.4 Algorithm for Calculating Body Force 474 13.4.5 Lemire and Vo’s Model 474 13.5 Governing Fluid Dynamic Equations 475 13.6 Results and Discussions 476 Bibliography 484 Index 487

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe why, what and how of the electric vehicle powertrain Empowers engineering professionals and students with the knowledge and skills required to engineer electric vehicle powertrain architectures, energy storage systems, power electronics converters and electric drives. The modern electric powertrain is relatively new for the automotive industry, and engineers are challenged with designing affordable, efficient and high-performance electric powertrains as the industry undergoes a technological evolution. Co-authored by two electric vehicle (EV) engineers with decades of experience designing and putting into production all of the powertrain technologies presented, this book provides readers with the hands-on knowledge, skills and expertise they need to rise to that challenge. This four-part practical guide provides a comprehensive review of battery, hybrid and fuel cell EV systems and the associated energy sources, power electronics, machines, and drives. Introduces and holisTrade ReviewHayes and Goodarzi have focused their considerable talent and experience to teaching the inner workings of the electric car. Readers, whether engineers, students, or the interested public will find this book a treasure trove of knowledge on modern automotive technology. In conclusion, what a great book! —John M Miller, J-N-J Miller Design Services PLLC, Longview, Texas, USA I highly recommend 'Electric Powertrain: Energy Systems, Power Electronics and Drives for Hybrid, Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles' by Dr John G. Hayes and Dr G. Abas Goodarzi. I use this book as my core teaching text on my module Transportation Power and Systems 3, which I teach to third year BEng and MEng Mechanical Engineering undergraduates in Queen's University Belfast. This book captures the fundamentals and in-depth aspects of the key elements of the course I teach including drive cycles, power trains for hybrids, vehicle dynamics, batteries and machines. The worked examples are excellent. The text book is very well laid out with superb well thought-out practical problems at the end of each chapter. This book is very relevant to those who wish to expand their knowledge of hybrid vehicles. It seamlessly integrates the electrical, civil and mechanical disciplines in this growing and multidisciplinary area. This is especially important considering the sustainable direction of land-based transport will take over the next decade as we strive to combat global warming and reduce greenhouse gas emissions. —Dr Aoife Foley, School of Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering, Queen's University Belfast, United KingdomTable of ContentsPreface xix Acknowledgments xxi Textbook Structure and Suggested Teaching Curriculum xxii About the Companion Web Site xxiv Part 1 Vehicles and Energy Sources 1 1 Electromobility and the Environment 3 1.1 A Brief History of the Electric Powertrain 4 1.1.1 Part I – The Birth of the Electric Car 4 1.1.2 Part II – The Resurgent Electric Powertrain 5 1.1.3 Part III – Success at Last for the Electric Powertrain 6 1.2 Energy Sources for Propulsion and Emissions 10 1.2.1 Carbon Emissions from Fuels 12 1.2.2 Greenhouse Gases and Pollutants 13 1.3 The Advent of Regulations 15 1.3.1 Regulatory Considerations and Emissions Trends 17 1.3.2 Heavy-Duty Vehicle Regulations 18 1.4 Drive Cycles 19 1.4.1 EPA Drive Cycles 19 1.5 BEV Fuel Consumption, Range, and mpge 24 1.6 Carbon Emissions for Conventional and Electric Powertrains 25 1.6.1 Well-to-Wheel and Cradle-to-Grave Emissions 27 1.6.2 Emissions due to the Electrical Grid 28 1.7 An Overview of Conventional, Battery, Hybrid, and Fuel Cell Electric Systems 29 1.7.1 Conventional IC Engine Vehicle 30 1.7.2 BEVs 30 1.7.3 HEVs 31 1.7.4 FCEV 33 1.7.5 A Comparison by Efficiency of Conventional, Hybrid, Battery, and Fuel Cell Vehicles 34 1.7.6 A Case Study Comparison of Conventional, Hybrid, Battery, and Fuel Cell Vehicles 35 1.8 A Comparison of Automotive and Other Transportation Technologies 36 References 37 Further Reading 38 Problems 38 Assignments 39 2 Vehicle Dynamics 40 2.1 Vehicle Load Forces 40 2.1.1 Basic Power, Energy, and Speed Relationships 41 2.1.2 Aerodynamic Drag 42 2.1.3 Rolling Resistance 45 2.1.4 Vehicle Road-Load Coefficients from EPA Coast-Down Testing 46 2.1.5 Battery Electric Vehicle Range at Constant Speed 49 2.1.6 Gradability 51 2.2 Vehicle Acceleration 52 2.2.1 Regenerative Braking of the Vehicle 54 2.2.2 Traction Motor Characteristics 54 2.2.3 Acceleration of the Vehicle 57 2.3 Simple Drive Cycle for Vehicle Comparisons 60 References 62 Further Reading 62 Problems 62 Sample MATLAB Code 63 Assignment: Modeling of a BEV 66 3 Batteries 68 3.1 Introduction to Batteries 68 3.1.1 Batteries Types and Battery Packs 68 3.1.2 Basic Battery Operation 73 3.1.3 Basic Electrochemistry 74 3.1.4 Units of Battery Energy Storage 76 3.1.5 Capacity Rate 77 3.1.6 Battery Parameters and Comparisons 79 3.2 Lifetime and Sizing Considerations 81 3.2.1 Examples of Battery Sizing 84 3.2.2 Battery Pack Discharge Curves and Aging 86 3.3 Battery Charging, Protection, and Management Systems 88 3.3.1 Battery Charging 88 3.3.2 Battery Failure and Protection 88 3.3.3 Battery Management System 89 3.4 Battery Models 90 3.4.1 A Simple Novel Curve Fit Model for BEV Batteries 92 3.4.2 Voltage, Current, Resistance, and Efficiency of Battery Pack 95 3.4.3 A Simple Curve-Fit Model for HEV Batteries 96 3.4.4 Charging 97 3.4.5 Determining the Cell/Pack Voltage for a Given Output\Input Power 99 3.4.6 Cell Energy and Discharge Rate 100 3.5 Example: The Fuel Economy of a BEV Vehicle with a Fixed Gear Ratio 102 References 105 Further Reading 106 Problems 106 Appendix: A Simplified Curve-Fit Model for BEV Batteries 108 4 Fuel Cells 111 4.1 Introduction to Fuel Cells 111 4.1.1 Fuel Cell Vehicle Emissions and Upstream Emissions 113 4.1.2 Hydrogen Safety Factors 113 4.2 Basic Operation 114 4.2.1 Fuel Cell Model and Cell Voltage 116 4.2.2 Power and Efficiency of Fuel Cell and Fuel Cell Power Plant System 118 4.2.3 Fuel Cell Characteristic Curves 119 4.3 Sizing the Fuel Cell Plant 120 4.3.1 Example: Sizing a Fuel Cell 121 4.3.2 Toyota Mirai 121 4.3.3 Balance of Plant 121 4.3.4 Boost DC-DC Converter 122 4.4 Fuel Cell Aging 122 4.5 Example: Sizing Fuel Cell System for Heavy Goods Tractor–Trailer Combination 124 4.6 Example: Fuel Economy of Fuel Cell Electric Vehicle 125 References 129 Problems 129 Assignments 130 5 Conventional and Hybrid Powertrains 131 5.1 Introduction to HEVs 131 5.2 Brake Specific Fuel Consumption 134 5.2.1 Example: Energy Consumption, Power Output, Efficiency, and BSFC 135 5.3 Comparative Examples of Conventional, Series, and Series-Parallel Hybrid Systems 138 5.3.1 Example: Fuel Economy of IC Engine Vehicle with Gasoline or Diesel Engine 138 5.3.2 Example: Fuel Economy of Series HEV 144 5.3.3 Example: Fuel Economy of Series-Parallel HEV 146 5.3.4 Summary of Comparisons 148 5.4 The Planetary Gears as a Power-Split Device 148 5.4.1 Powertrain of 2004 Toyota Prius 150 5.4.2 Example: CVT Operating in Electric Drive Mode (Vehicle Launch and Low Speeds) 151 5.4.3 Example: CVT Operating in Full-Power Mode 153 5.4.4 Example: CVT Operating in Cruising and Generating Mode 154 References 155 Problems 155 Assignments 156 Part 2 Electrical Machines 159 6 Introduction to Traction Machines 161 6.1 Propulsion Machine Overview 161 6.1.1 DC Machines 162 6.1.2 AC Machines 163 6.1.3 Comparison of Traction Machines 167 6.1.4 Case Study – Mars Rover Traction Motor 169 6.2 Machine Specifications 170 6.2.1 Four-Quadrant Operation 170 6.2.2 Rated Parameters 171 6.2.3 Rated Torque 172 6.2.4 Rated and Base Speeds 172 6.2.5 Rated Power 172 6.2.6 Peak Operation 173 6.2.7 Starting Torque 173 6.3 Characteristic Curves of a Machine 173 6.3.1 Constant-Torque Mode 173 6.3.2 Constant-Power Mode 174 6.3.3 Maximum-Speed Mode 174 6.3.4 Efficiency Maps 174 6.4 Conversion Factors of Machine Units 176 References 177 7 The Brushed DC Machine 178 7.1 DC Machine Structure 178 7.2 DC Machine Electrical Equivalent Circuit 180 7.3 DC Machine Circuit Equations 182 7.3.1 No-Load Spinning Loss 183 7.3.2 No-Load Speed 184 7.3.3 Maximum Power 184 7.3.4 Rated Conditions 184 7.4 Power, Losses, and Efficiency in the PM DC Machine 185 7.5 Machine Control using Power Electronics 186 7.5.1 Example: Motoring using a PM DC Machine 186 7.6 Machine Operating as a Motor or Generator in Forward or Reverse Modes 189 7.6.1 Example: Generating/Braking using a PM DC Machine 190 7.6.2 Example: Motoring in Reverse 191 7.7 Saturation and Armature Reaction 191 7.7.1 Example: Motoring using PM DC Machine and Machine Saturation 192 7.8 Using PM DC Machine for EV Powertrain 193 7.8.1 Example: Maximum Speeds using PM DC Machine 194 7.9 Using WF DC Machine for EV Powertrain 195 7.9.1 Example: Motoring using WF DC Machine 197 7.10 Case Study – Mars Rover Traction Machine 199 7.11 Thermal Characteristics of Machine 201 7.11.1 Example of Steady-State Temperature Rise 202 7.11.2 Transient Temperature Rise 203 7.11.3 Example of Transient Temperature Rise 203 References 204 Problems 204 8 Induction Machines 206 8.1 Stator Windings and the Spinning Magnetic Field 207 8.1.1 Stator Magnetic Flux Density 209 8.1.2 Space-Vector Current and the Rotating Magnetic Field 211 8.2 Induction Machine Rotor Voltage, Current, and Torque 216 8.2.1 Rotor Construction 216 8.2.2 Induction Machine Theory of Operation 216 8.3 Machine Model and Steady-State Operation 219 8.3.1 Power in Three-Phase Induction Machine 222 8.3.2 Torque in Three-Phase Induction Machine 223 8.3.3 Phasor Analysis of Induction Motor 225 8.3.4 Machine Operation When Supplied by Current Source 225 8.4 Variable-Speed Operation of Induction Machine 234 8.4.1 Constant Volts per hertz Operation 235 8.4.2 Variable-Speed Operation 235 8.5 Machine Test 240 8.5.1 DC Resistance Test 240 8.5.2 Locked-Rotor Test 240 8.5.3 No-Load Test 242 References 244 Further Reading 244 Problems 245 Sample MATLAB Code 246 9 Surface-Permanent-Magnet AC Machines 249 9.1 Basic Operation of SPM Machines 249 9.1.1 Back EMF of a Single Coil 249 9.1.2 Back EMF of Single Phase 250 9.1.3 SPM Machine Equations 253 9.2 Per-Phase Analysis of SPM Machine 255 9.2.1 Per-Phase Equivalent Circuit Model for SPM Machine 256 9.2.2 Phasor Analysis of SPM Machine 257 9.2.3 Machine Saturation 263 9.2.4 SPM Torque–Speed Characteristics 264 9.2.5 High-Speed Operation of SPM Machine above Rated Speed 266 9.2.6 Machine Characteristics for Field-Weakened Operation 270 References 272 Further Reading 273 Problems 273 MATLAB Code 274 10 Interior-Permanent-Magnet AC Machine 276 10.1 Machine Structure and Torque Equations 276 10.2 d- and q-Axis Inductances 278 10.2.1 Example: Estimating the d-axis and q-axis Inductances for 2004 Toyota Prius Motor 281 10.3 IPM Machine Test 281 10.3.1 No-Load Spin Test 282 10.3.2 DC Torque Test 282 10.4 Basic Theory and Low-Speed Operation 286 10.4.1 Example: Motoring at Rated Condition 287 10.4.2 Maximum Torque per Ampere (MTPA) 289 10.4.3 Maximum Torque per Volt (MTPV) or Maximum Torque per Flux (MTPF) 289 10.5 High-Speed Operation of IPM Machine 289 10.5.1 Example: Motoring at High Speed using IPM Machine 289 10.6 dq Modeling of Machines 291 10.6.1 Constant Current Transformation 292 10.6.2 Constant Power Transformation 294 References 295 Further Reading 295 Problems 296 Assignments 298 Part 3 Power Electronics 299 11 DC-DC Converters 301 11.1 Introduction 301 11.2 Power Conversion – Common and Basic Principles 304 11.2.1 The Basic Topologies 306 11.2.2 The Half-Bridge Buck-Boost Bidirectional Converter 307 11.3 The Buck or Step-Down Converter 307 11.3.1 Analysis of Voltage Gain of Buck Converter in CCM 309 11.3.2 BCM Operation of Buck Converter 317 11.3.3 DCM Operation of Buck Converter 319 11.4 The Boost or Step-up Converter 325 11.4.1 Analysis of Voltage Gain of Boost Converter in CCM 326 11.4.2 BCM Operation of Boost Converter 330 11.4.3 DCM Operation of Boost Converter 332 11.5 Power Semiconductors 336 11.5.1 Power Semiconductor Power Loss 337 11.5.2 Total Semiconductor Power Loss and Junction Temperature 341 11.6 Passive Components for Power Converters 342 11.6.1 Example: Inductor Sizing 342 11.6.2 Capacitor Sizing 343 11.7 Interleaving 343 11.7.1 Example: Two-Phase Interleaved Boost Converter 345 References 346 Further Reading 346 Problems 346 Assignments 349 Appendix I 349 Appendix II: Buck-Boost Converter 349 Appendix III: Silicon Carbide Converters and Inverters 352 12 Isolated DC-DC Converters 353 12.1 Introduction 353 12.1.1 Advantages of Isolated Power Converters 353 12.1.2 Power Converter Families 354 12.2 The Forward Converter 355 12.2.1 CCM Currents in Forward Converter 357 12.2.2 CCM Voltages in Forward Converter 362 12.2.3 Sizing the Transformer 365 12.3 The Full-Bridge Converter 365 12.3.1 Operation of Hard-Switched Full-Bridge Converter 367 12.3.2 CCM Currents in Full-Bridge Converter 370 12.3.3 CCM Voltages in the Full-Bridge Converter 376 12.4 Resonant Power Conversion 377 12.4.1 LCLC Series-Parallel Resonant Converter 377 12.4.2 Desirable Converter Characteristics for Inductive Charging 378 12.4.3 Fundamental-Mode Analysis and Current-Source Operation 381 12.4.4 Simulation 385 References 388 Further Reading 388 Problems 388 Assignments 390 Appendix I: RMS and Average Values of Ramp and Step Waveforms 390 Appendix II: Flyback Converter 391 13 Traction Drives and Three-Phase Inverters 392 13.1 Three-Phase Inverters 392 13.2 Modulation Schemes 393 13.2.1 Sinusoidal Modulation 395 13.2.2 Sinusoidal Modulation with Third Harmonic Addition 396 13.2.3 Overmodulation and Square Wave 398 13.3 Sinusoidal Modulation 398 13.3.1 Modulation Index m 399 13.3.2 Inverter Currents 401 13.3.3 Switch, Diode, and Input Average Currents 401 13.3.4 Switch, Diode, DC Link, and Input Capacitor RMS Currents 403 13.3.5 Example: Inverter Currents 404 13.4 Inverter Power Loss 405 13.4.1 Conduction Loss of IGBT and Diode 405 13.4.2 Switching Loss of IGBT Module 405 13.4.3 Total Semiconductor Power Loss and Junction Temperature 407 13.4.4 Example: Regenerative Currents 408 References 409 Further Reading 409 Problems 410 Assignments 411 14 Battery Charging 412 14.1 Basic Requirements for Charging System 412 14.2 Charger Architectures 414 14.3 Grid Voltages, Frequencies, and Wiring 416 14.4 Charger Functions 418 14.4.1 Real Power, Apparent Power, and Power Factor 419 14.5 Charging Standards and Technologies 422 14.5.1 SAE J1772 422 14.5.2 VDE-AR-E 2623-2-2 425 14.5.3 CHAdeMo 425 14.5.4 Tesla 425 14.5.5 Wireless Charging 425 14.6 The Boost Converter for Power Factor Correction 427 14.6.1 The Boost PFC Power Stage 428 14.6.2 Sizing the Boost Inductor 430 14.6.3 Average Currents in the Rectifier 431 14.6.4 Switch and Diode Average Currents 432 14.6.5 Switch, Diode, and Capacitor RMS Currents 434 14.6.6 Power Semiconductors for Charging 434 References 438 Further Reading 438 Problems 439 Assignments 440 15 Control of the Electric Drive 441 15.1 Introduction to Control 441 15.1.1 Feedback Controller Design Approach 442 15.2 Modeling the Electromechanical System 443 15.2.1 The Mechanical System 443 15.2.2 The PM DC Machine 446 15.2.3 The DC-DC Power Converter 447 15.2.4 The PI Controller 447 15.3 Designing Torque Loop Compensation 448 15.3.1 Example: Determining Compensator Gain Coefficients for Torque Loop 449 15.4 Designing Speed Control Loop Compensation 449 15.4.1 Example: Determining Compensator Gain Coefficients for Speed Loop 451 15.5 Acceleration of Battery Electric Vehicle (BEV) using PM DC Machine 451 15.6 Acceleration of BEV using WF DC Machine 452 References 455 Problems 455 Assignment and Sample MATLAB Codes 456 Part 4 Electromagnetism 459 16 Introduction to Electromagnetism, Ferromagnetism, and Electromechanical Energy Conversion 461 16.1 Electromagnetism 462 16.1.1 Maxwell’s Equations 462 16.2 Ferromagnetism 467 16.2.1 Magnetism and Hysteresis 467 16.2.2 Hard and Soft Ferromagnetic Materials 470 16.3 Self-Inductance 473 16.3.1 Basic Inductor Operation 474 16.3.2 Inductor Equations 475 16.3.3 Reluctance 478 16.3.4 Energy Stored in Magnetic Field 481 16.3.5 Core Loss 482 16.3.6 Copper Loss 484 16.3.7 Inductor Sizing using Area Product 487 16.3.8 High-Frequency Operation and Skin Depth 488 16.4 Hard Ferromagnetic Materials and Permanent Magnets 489 16.4.1 Example: Remanent Flux Density 490 16.4.2 Example: The Recoil Line 492 16.4.3 Example: Air Gap Flux Density due to a Permanent Magnet 494 16.4.4 Maximum Energy Product 494 16.4.5 Force due to Permanent Magnet 494 16.4.6 Electromagnet 497 16.5 The Transformer 498 16.5.1 Theory of Operation 498 16.5.2 Transformer Equivalent Circuit 500 16.5.3 Transformer Voltages and Currents 501 16.5.4 Sizing the Transformer using the Area-Product (AP) Method 505 16.6 The Capacitor 506 16.6.1 Sizing Polypropylene High-Voltage Capacitor 508 16.7 Electromechanical Energy Conversion 509 16.7.1 Ampere’s Force Law 509 16.7.2 General Expression for Torque on Current-Carrying Coil 510 16.7.3 Torque, Flux Linkage, and Current 511 16.7.4 Faraday’s Law of Electromagnetic Induction 512 16.7.5 Lenz’s Law and Fleming’s Right Hand Rule 512 References 513 Further Reading 514 Further Viewing 515 Problems 515 Assignments 518 Reference Conversion Table 519 Index 521

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis student version of the popular bestseller, Life Cycle Assessment Handbook, is not a watered-down version of the original, but retains all of the important information and valuable lessons provided in the first book, along with helpful problems and solutions for the student learning about Life Cycle Assessment (LCA). As the last several decades have seen a dramatic rise in the application of LCA in decision making, the interest in the life cycle concept as an environmental management and sustainability tool continues to grow. The LCA Student Handbook offers a look at the role that life cycle information, in the hands of companies, governments and consumers, may have in improving the environmental performance of products and technologies. It concisely and clearly presents the various aspects of LCA in order to help the reader better understand the subject. The international success of the sustainability paradigm needs the participation of many stakeholders, including citizens,Table of ContentsPreface ix 1 Introduction to Life Cycle Assessment 1 References from the LCA Handbook 1 Aims of the Chapter 2 1.1 Purpose of the Student Handbook 2 1.2 Why LCA? 2 1.3 Evolution of Environmental toward Life Cycle Thinking 2 1.4 Examples of Environmental Impact Trade-Offs 7 1.5 LCA Methodology 11 1.6 Maintaining Transparency (Openness) 15 1.7 Conclusions 16 References 16 Chapter 1 Exercises 18 2 Goal and Scope Definition in Life Cycle Assessment 19 References from the LCA Handbook 19 Aims of the Chapter 20 2.1 Introduction 20 2.2 Components of a Well-Defined Study 22 2.2.1 System Function 23 2.2.2 Functional Unit 23 2.2.3 Defining the System Boundaries (Scoping) 28 2.2.4 Co-Product Allocation 29 2.2.5 Impact Assessment 29 2.3 Consequential LCA 30 2.4 Carbon Footprint versus LCA 30 2.5 Creating a Goal Statement 31 2.6 Preparing a Goal and Scope Document 34 References 35 Appendix: Hypothetical Example of a Comparative, Attributional Life Cycle Assessment to Support Government Decision Making 36 Chapter 2 Exercises 56 3 Life Cycle Inventory 61 References from the LCA Handbook 61 Aims of the Chapter 62 3.1 Introduction 62 3.2 Modeling Inputs and Outputs 63 3.3 Methodology Issues 64 3.3.1 Cut-Off Rules 64 3.3.2 Co-Product Allocation 66 3.3.3 Postconsumer Recycling 68 3.3.4 Converting Scrap 71 3.3.5 Water Use 72 3.3.6 Carbon Tracking Considerations 73 3.4 Data Uncertainty and Sensitivity Analysis 74 3.5 Databases and Data Sources 75 3.5.1 Private Industrial Data 77 3.5.2 Public Industrial Data 79 3.5.3 Dedicated LCI databases 79 3.5.4 Non-LCI Data 80 3.6 Collecting LCI Data 86 3.7 Reporting Life Cycle Inventory 86 3.8 Life Cycle Inventory Data Quality 89 3.9 Economic Input/Output (EIO) Data 92 3.10 Consequential LCA 93 3.11 LCA Software 94 3.11.1 Characteristics of LCA Software Systems 95 3.11.2 Web Tools versus Desktop Tools 95 3.11.3 Commercial Tools versus Freeware 110 3.11.4 Open Source versus Closed Source 111 3.11.5 General LCA Tools versus Specialized Tools versus Add-Ons 112 3.11.6 Two Basic LCA Software User Types and Their Needs 113 3.11.7 The LCA Software Market 114 3.11.8 The Main LCA Software Systems 115 References 117 Chapter 3 Exercises 136 4 Life Cycle Impact Assessment 137 References from the LCA Handbook 137 Aims of the Chapter 138 4.1 Introduction 138 4.2 Choice of Impact Models and Categories 142 4.3 Current LCIA Approaches 143 4.3.1 Stratospheric Ozone Depletion 144 4.3.2 Global Warming Potential 145 4.3.3 Nonrenewable Resource Depletion Potential 147 4.3.4 Acidification Potential 149 4.3.5 Eutrophication Potential 150 4.3.6 Energy 151 4.4 The Agri-Food Sector 152 4.4.1 Land Use 152 4.4.2 Water Use 154 LCIA Models and Tools 158 References 159 Chapter 4 Exercises 205 5 Normalization, Grouping and Weighting in Life Cycle Assessment 207 References from the LCA Handbook 207 Aims of the chapter 208 5.1 Introduction 208 5.2 Current Practice of Normalization and Weighting in LCIA 210 5.3 Principles of External Normalization 211 5.4 Issues with External Normalization 212 5.5 Inherent Data Gaps 212 5.6 Masking Salient Aspects 212 5.7 Compensation 214 5.8 Spatial Boundaries and Time Frames 214 5.9 Divergence in Databases 214 5.10 Principles of Internal Normalization 215 5.11 Compensatory Methods 215 5.12 Partially Compensatory Methods 216 5.13 Weighting 217 5.14 Multi-Criteria Decision Making 219 References 220 Appendix: TRACI 2.1 Normalization Factors 222 6 Life Cycle Assessment: Interpretation and Reporting 225 References from the LCA Handbook 225 Aims of the Chapter 226 6.1 Introduction 226 6.2 LCA Interpretation according to ISO 228 6.3 Uncertainty and Sensitivity Analysis 230 6.3.1 Uncertainty Analysis 230 6.3.2 Uncertainty in Impact Models 230 6.3.3 Sensitivity Analysis 231 A SIMPLE BUT NON-LINEAR SYSTEM 232 6.3.4 Monte Carlo Simulation 233 6.4 Contribution Analysis 234 6.5 Presenting LCIA Results 236 6.6 Preparing the Final Report 236 6.7 The Review Process 241 6.7.1 ISO-Defined LCA Review 241 6.7.2 Conduct of an LCA Review 242 6.7.3 Review of Inventory Data 243 6.7.4 Timing the Review 243 6.8 Product Category Rules and Environmental Product Declarations 244 6.8.1 Type III Environmental Product Declarations 245 6.8.2 An EPD is a Document 245 6.8.3 An EPD is Primarily Based on LCA 246 6.8.4 An EPD is Developed by Following a “Product Category Rule” 246 6.8.5 An EPD can contain other Relevant Information beyond the LCA 246 6.8.6 Further Information on EPDs and PCRs 247 References 247 Chapter 6 Exercises 249 7 Life Cycle Sustainability Assessment 253 References from the LCA Handbook 253 Aims of the Chapter 253 7.1 Introduction 254 7.2 Life Cycle Assessment and Sustainability 255 7.3 A Framework for LCSA 258 7.3.1 Broadening of the Object of Analysis 260 7.3.2 Broadening of the Spectrum of Indicators 261 7.3.3 Deepening 264 7.4 Social Responsibility 266 7.4.1 The Social LCA Framework 267 7.4.2 Iterative process of Social Life Cycle Assessment 268 7.4.3 SLCA and other Key Social Responsibility References and Instruments 275 7.5 Research Needs for LCSA Methodology 279 References 281 Chapter 7 Exercises 286 8 Resources for Conducting Life Cycle Assessment 287 Books 287 Organizations 288 LCA Centers and Societies 292 Glossary 297

Read more less

Book SynopsisA practical guide for putting PMBOK concepts to work A Project Manager's Book of Tools and Techniques is an invaluable resource for students and working professionals alike. Whether you're preparing for the PMP exam or just looking to optimize your project management skills, this book provides detailed explanations for over 100 essential tools described in the Project Management Institute's A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK Guide) Sixth Edition. Going beyond theory and concept to real-world practice, these tools and techniques are the how of effective project management; from planning, to implementation, to oversight, and beyond, all phases of the project are represented here to help you more effectively apply critical PMBOK concepts. Comprehensive examples illustrate real-world implementation, and detailed discussion provides expert guidance for both new and experienced project management professionals. KnowiTable of ContentsAcknowledgments vii Introduction ix Part 1 Data Gathering 1 1.0 Data Gathering Techniques 2 1.1 Benchmarking 3 1.2 Brainstorming 6 1.3 Check Sheets 8 1.4 Checklists 10 1.5 Focus Groups 12 1.6 Statistical Sampling 14 Part 2 Data Analysis 17 2.0 Data Analysis Techniques 18 2.1 Alternatives Analysis 19 2.2 Cost Benefi t Analysis 24 2.3 Cost of Quality 27 2.4 Decision Tree 31 2.5 Earned Value Analysis 36 2.6 Infl uence Diagrams 41 2.7 Make-or-Buy Analysis 44 2.8 Performance Index 46 2.9 Regression Analysis 48 2.10 Reserve Analysis 51 2.11 Root Cause Analysis 55 2.12 Sensitivity Analysis 58 2.13 Stakeholder Analysis 63 2.14 SWOT Analysis 67 2.15 Technical Performance Analysis 70 2.16 Variance Analysis 72 2.17 What-If Analysis 74 Part 3 Data Representation 77 3.0 Data Representation Techniques 78 3.1 Cause-and-Effect Diagram 79 3.2 Control Charts 82 3.3 Flowcharts 87 3.4 Histograms 90 3.5 Logical Data Model 93 3.6 Mind Mapping 96 3.7 Probability and Impact Matrix 98 3.8 Resource Breakdown Structure 101 3.9 Responsibility Assignment Matrix 103 3.10 Scatter Diagrams 106 3.11 Stakeholder Mapping 108 Part 4 Estimating 111 4.0 Estimating Techniques 112 4.1 Analogous Estimating 113 4.2 Bottom-Up Estimating 116 4.3 Estimate at Completion 119 4.4 Estimate to Complete 123 4.5 Parametric Estimating 126 4.6 To-Complete Performance Index 128 4.7 Three-Point Estimating 131 4.8 Variance at Completion 134 Part 5 Interpersonal and Team Skills 137 5.0 Interpersonal and Team Skills 138 5.1 Confl ict Management 139 5.2 Decision Making 145 5.3 Nominal Group Technique 151 5.4 Problem Solving 153 Part 6 Other Techniques 157 6.0 Other Techniques 158 6.1 Context Diagram 159 6.2 Critical Path Method 161 6.3 Funding Limit Reconciliation 170 6.4 Inspection 172 6.5 Leads and Lags 174 6.6 Precedence Diagramming Method 177 6.7 Prompt Lists 181 6.8 Prototypes 184 6.9 Resource Optimization 186 6.10 Rolling-Wave Planning 189 6.11 Schedule Compression 192 Appendix: Case Study Scenarios 197 Index 203

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn updated fourth edition of the text that provides an understanding of chemical transformations and the formation of structures at surfaces The revised and enhanced fourth edition of Surface Science covers all the essential techniques and phenomena that are relevant to the field. The text elucidates the structural, dynamical, thermodynamic and kinetic principles concentrating on gas/solid and liquid/solid interfaces. These principles allow for an understanding of how and why chemical transformations occur at surfaces. The author (a noted expert on in the field) combines the required chemistry, physics and mathematics to create a text that is accessible and comprehensive. The fourth edition incorporates new end-of-chapter exercises, the solutions to which are available on-line to demonstrate how problem solving that is relevant to surface science should be performed. Each chapter begins with simple principles and builds to more advanced ones. The advancedTable of ContentsDedication i Preface ii Surface Science: Fundamentals of Catalysis and Nanoscience 1 Introduction 1 I.1 Heterogeneous Catalysis 2 I.2 Why surfaces? 4 I.3 Where are surfaces, interfaces and nanoscale objects important? 5 I.3.1 Ammonia Synthesis 5 I.3.2 Gas-to-Liquids: Fischer-Tropsch Synthesis, C1 Chemistry & Artificial Photosynthesis 6 I.3.3 Clean Propulsion Three-way Catalyst, Lithium ion batteries, fuel cells 7 I.3.4 Water Splitting: Oxygen and hydrogen evolution reactions (OER and HER) 8 I.4 Semiconductor Processing and Nanotechnology 9 I.5 Other Areas of Relevance 12 I.6 Structure of the Book 12 Further Reading 14 References 14 Chapter 1. Surface and Adsorbate Structure 2 1.1 Clean Surface Structure 3 1.1.1 Ideal flat surfaces 3 1.1.2 High index and vicinal planes 9 1.1.3 Faceted Surfaces 10 1.1.4 Bimetallic Surfaces 11 1.1.5 Oxide and Compound Semiconductor Surfaces 13 1.1.6 The Carbon Family: Diamond, Graphite, Graphene, Fullerenes and Carbon Nanotubes 17 1.1.7 Two-Dimensional Solids (2D solids) 26 Advanced Topic: Stacked Two-Dimensional Materials and Moiré Superlattices 28 1.1.8 Porous Solids 31 1.2 Reconstruction and adsorbate structure 34 1.2.1 Implications of surface heterogeneity for adsorbates 34 1.2.2 Clean Surface Reconstructions 37 1.2.3 Adsorbate induced reconstructions 39 1.2.4 Islands 45 1.2.5 Chiral surfaces 45 1.3 Band structure of solids 48 1.3.1 Bulk electronic states 48 1.3.2 Metals, semiconductors and insulators 50 1.3.3 Energy levels at metal interfaces 57 1.3.4 Energy Levels at Metal-Semiconductor Interfaces 61 1.3.5 Surface electronic states 64 1.3.6 Size effects in nanoscale systems 67 1.4 The vibrations of solids 71 1.4.1 Bulk systems 71 1.4.2 Nanoscale systems 73 1.5 Summary of important concepts 74 1.6 Frontiers and Challenges 75 1.7 Further Reading 76 1.8 Exercises 77 References 81 Chapter 2. Experimental Probes and Techniques 2 2.1 Ultrahigh vacuum 2 2.1.1 The need for UHV 2 2.1.2 Attaining UHV 4 2.2 Light and electron sources 6 2.2.1 Types of lasers 7 2.2.2 Atomic lamps 10 2.2.3 Synchrotrons 10 2.2.4 Free electron laser (FEL) 11 2.2.5 Electron guns 11 2.3 Molecular beams 12 2.3.1 Knudsen molecular beams 13 2.3.2 Free jets 15 2.2.3 Comparison of Knudsen and Supersonic Beams 18 2.4 Scanning probe techniques 22 2.4.1 Scanning tunnelling microscopy (STM) 23 2.4.2 Scanning tunnelling spectroscopy (STS) 29 2.4.3 Scanning electrochemical microscopy (SECM) 32 2.4.4 Atomic force microscopy (AFM) 32 2.4.5 Near-field optical microscopy (NSOM) 39 2.5 Low energy electron diffraction (LEED) 46 Advanced Topic: LEED structure determination 51 2.6 Electron spectroscopy 57 2.6.1 X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy (XPS) 59 2.6.1.1 Quantitative analysis 64 2.6.2 Ultraviolet photoelectron spectroscopy (UPS) 66 2.6.2.1 Angle-resolved ultraviolet photoemission (ARUPS) 69 Advanced Topic: Multiphoton photoemission (MPPE) 73 2.6.3 Auger electron spectroscopy (AES) 75 2.6.3.1 Quantitative analysis 78 2.6.4 Photoelectron microscopy 81 2.6.4.1 Profiling and xy mapping with XPS 81 2.6.4.2 Depth profiling and xy mapping with AES 82 2.6.4.3 Photoemission electron microscope (PEEM) 82 2.7 Vibrational spectroscopy 83 2.7.1 IR spectroscopy 88 2.7.2 Electron energy loss spectroscopy (EELS) 94 2.7.2.1 Three scattering mechanisms 96 2.8 Second Harmonic and Sum Frequency Generation 97 2.9 Summary of important concepts 101 2.10 Frontiers and challenges 102 2.12 Further reading 103 2.13 Exercises 104 References 112 Chapter 3. Chemisorption, Physisorption and Dynamics 1 3.1 Types of interactions 1 3.2 Binding sites and diffusion 3 3.3 Physisorption 9 Advanced Topic: Theoretical Description of Physisorption 9 3.4 Non-dissociative chemisorption 11 3.4.1 Theoretical treatment of chemisorption 11 3.4.2 The Blyholder model of CO chemisorption on a metal 17 3.4.3 Molecular oxygen chemisorption 21 3.4.4 The binding of ethene 22 3.5 Dissociative chemisorption: H2 on a simple metal 25 3.6 What determines the reactivity of metals? 28 3.7 Atoms and molecules incident on a surface 34 3.7.1 Scattering channels 35 3.7.2 Non-activated adsorption 38 3.7.3 Hard cube model 42 3.7.4 Activated adsorption 46 3.7.5 Direct versus precursor mediated adsorption 48 3.8 Microscopic reversibility in ad/desorption phenomena 51 3.9 The influence of individual degrees of freedom on adsorption and desorption 59 3.9.1 Energy exchange 59 3.9.2 PES topography and the relative efficacy of energetic components 62 3.10 Translations, corrugation, surface atom motions 63 3.10.1 Effects on adsorption 63 3.10.2 Connecting adsorption and desorption with microscopic reversibility 68 3.10.3 Normal energy scaling 70 3.11 Rotations and adsorption 72 3.11.1 Non-activated adsorption 72 3.11.2 Activated adsorption 76 3.12 Vibrations and adsorption 76 3.13 Competitive adsorption and collision induced processes 78 3.13.1 High energy collisions 82 3.14 Classification of reaction mechanisms 84 3.14.1 Langmuir-Hinshelwood mechanism 84 3.14.2 Eley-Rideal mechanism 87 3.14.3 Hot atom mechanism 89 3.15 Measurement of sticking coefficients 91 3.16 Summary of Important Concepts 97 3.17 Frontiers and challenges 99 3.18 Further Reading 100 3.19 Exercises 101 References 113 Table of Figures and Tables iii Chapter 4. Thermodynamics and Kinetics of Adsorption & Desorption 5 4.1 Thermodynamics of ad/desorption 2 4.1.1 Single-particle versus distribution-averaged quantities 2 4.1.2 Binding energies and activation barriers 5 4.1.3 Thermodynamic quantities 8 4.1.4 Some definitions 9 4.1.5 Absorption enthalpy 11 4.2 Adsorption isotherms from thermodynamics 15 4.2.1 Adsorbate chemical potential and activity 19 4.3 Lateral interactions 21 4.4 Rate of desorption 24 4.4.1 First-order desorption 25 4.4.2 Transition state theory treatment of first-order desorption 26 4.4.3 Thermodynamic treatment of first-order desorption 33 4.4.4 Adsorption entropy 36 4.4.5 Configurational entropy 40 4.4.6 Non-first-order desorption 41 4.5 Kinetics of adsorption 44 4.5.1 CTST approach to adsorption kinetics 44 4.5.2 Langmuirian adsorption: Non-dissociative adsorption 45 4.5.3 Langmuirian adsorption: Dissociative adsorption 49 4.5.4 Dissociative Langmuirian adsorption with lateral interactions 50 4.5.5 Precursor mediated adsorption 52 4.6 Adsorption isotherms from kinetics 55 4.6.1 Langmuir Isotherm 55 4.6.2 Classification of adsorption isotherms 57 4.6.3 Thermodynamic measurements via isotherms 60 4.7 Temperature programmed desorption (TPD) 61 4.7.1 The basis of TPD 61 4.7.2 Qualitative analysis of TPD spectra 64 4.7.3 Quantitative analysis of TPD spectra 68 4.8 Summary of Important Concepts 72 4.9 Frontiers and Challenges 74 4.10 Further Reading 74 4.11 Exercises 75 References 85 Chapter 5. Liquid interfaces 1 5.1 Structure of the liquid/solid interface 2 5.1.1 The structure of the water/solid interface 4 5.2 Surface energy and surface tension 9 5.2.1 Liquid surfaces 10 5.2.2 Curved interfaces 14 5.2.3 Surface Melting and Surface Crystallization 17 5.2.4 Capillary Waves 18 5.3 Liquid films 21 5.3.1 Liquid-on-solid films 21 5.4 Langmuir films 25 5.5 Langmuir-Blodgett films 29 5.5.1 Capillary condensation and meniscus formation 29 5.5.2 Vertical Deposition 33 5.5.3 Horizontal Lifting (Schaefer's method) 36 5.6 Self assembled monolayers (SAMs) 37 5.6.1 Thermodynamics of self-assembly 38 5.6.2 Amphiphiles and bonding interactions 40 5.6.3 Mechanism of SAM formation 41 Advanced Topic: Chemistry with Self Assembled Monolayers 46 5.7 Thermodynamics of liquid interfaces 47 5.7.1 The Gibbs model 48 5.7.2 Surface Excess 50 5.7.3 Interfacial enthalpy and internal, Helmholtz and Gibbs surface energies 50 5.7.4 Gibbs adsorption isotherm 52 5.8 Electrified and Charged Interfaces 54 5.8.1 Surface charge and potential 54 5.8.2 Relating work functions to the electrochemical series 58 5.9 Summary of important concepts 61 5.10 Frontiers and challenges 62 5.11 Further reading 63 5.12 Exercises 64 References 70 Chapter 6. Heterogeneous Catalysis 1 6.1 The prominence of heterogeneous reactions 1 6.2 How to choose a catalyst 4 6.3 Sabatier analysis and optimal catalyst selection 9 6.4 Measurement of surface kinetics and reaction mechanisms 13 6.5 Haber-Bosch process 19 6.6 From microscopic kinetics to catalysis 27 6.6.1 Reaction kinetics 27 6.6.2 Kinetic analysis using De Donder relations 30 6.6.3 Counting sites in surface kinetics 31 6.6.4 Definition of the rate determining step (RDS) 33 6.6.5 Microkinetic analysis of ammonia synthesis 36 6.7 Fischer-Tropsch synthesis and related chemistry 40 6.7.1 Steam Reforming 41 6.7.2 Water gas shift reaction 42 6.7.3 Methanol synthesis 42 6.7.4 Fischer-Tropsch synthesis 43 6.8 The three-way automotive catalyst 49 6.9 Promoters 54 6.10 Poisons 56 6.11 Bimetallic & bifunctional catalysts 58 6.12 Rate oscillations and spatiotemporal pattern formation 61 Advanced Topic: Cluster assembled catalysts 65 6.13 Electrocatalysis 66 6.13.1 Hydrogen evolution reaction (HER) and H2 oxidation reaction (HOR) 68 6.13.2 Oxygen evolution reaction (OER) and O2 reduction reaction (ORR) 70 Advanced Topic: Water Splitting in Photosystem II 73 6.14 Summary of Important Concepts 75 6.15 Frontiers and Challenges 76 6.16 Further Reading 77 6.17 Exercises 78 Chapter 7. Growth and Epitaxy 7 7.1 Stress and Strain 7 7.2 Types of Interfaces 12 7.2.1 Strain Relief 13 7.3 Surface Energy, Surface Tension & Strain Energy 15 7.4 Growth Modes 20 7.4.1 Solid-on-Solid Growth 20 7.4.2 Strain in Solid-on-Solid Growth 22 Layer by layer Growth = Frank-van der Merwe (FM) [34] 22 Layer + island growth = Stranski-Krastanov (SK) [35] 22 Three Dimensional Island Growth = Volmer-Weber (VW) [36] 23 7.4.3 Ostwald Ripening 25 7.4.4 Equilibrium Overlayer Structure and Growth Mode 27 7.5 Nucleation theory 30 7.5.1 Cloud Formation: Heterogeneous versus Homogeneous Nucleation 34 7.6 Growth Away from Equilibrium 35 7.6.1 Thermodynamics versus Dynamics 35 7.6.2 Non-equilibrium growth modes 37 7.7 Techniques for Growing Layers 41 7.7.1 Molecular Beam Epitaxy (MBE) 42 7.7.2 Chemical Vapour Deposition (CVD) 47 7.7.3 Atomic Layer Deposition (ALD) 53 7.7.4 Ablation Techniques 54 7.7.5 Growth on liquid metals 55 7.7.6 van der Waals epitaxy 56 7.8 Catalytic Growth of Nanotubes and Nanowires 59 7.9 Etching 67 7.9.1 Classification of Etching 69 7.9.2 Etch morphologies 74 7.9.3 Porous Solid Formation 76 7.9.4 Silicon etching in aqueous fluoride solutions 80 7.9.5 Selective Area Growth and Etching 85 7.9.6 Atomic Layer Etching (ALE) 89 Advanced Topic: Nanosphere Lithography 91 7.9.7 Coal Gasification and Graphite Etching 93 7.10 Summary of Important Concepts 95 7.11 Frontiers and Challenges 96 7.12 Further Reading 98 7.13 Exercises 99 References 103 Chapter 8. Laser & Non-thermal chemistry: Photon and electron stimulated chemistry & atom manipulation 1 8.1 Photon Excitation of Surfaces 2 8.1.1 Light absorption by condensed matter 2 8.1.2 Lattice heating 5 8.1.3 Advanced Topic: Temporal evolution of electronic excitations 11 8.1.3.1 Slow pulse excitation (>100 ps) 16 8.1.3.2 Ultrafast pulse excitation (1–10 ps) 17 8.1.3.3 Even faster (<1 ps) 18 8.1.4 Summary of Laser Excitations 22 8.1.5 Plasmon Excitation 23 8.2 Mechanisms of Electron and photon stimulated processes 24 8.2.1 Direct versus substrate mediated processes 24 8.2.2 Gas phase photochemistry 26 8.2.3 Gas Phase Electron Stimulated Chemistry 29 8.2.4 MGR & Antoniewicz models of DIET 30 8.2.5 Desorption Induced by Ultrafast Excitation 35 8.3 Photon and electron induced chemistry at surfaces 37 8.3.1 Thermal desorption, reaction and diffusion 37 8.3.2 Stimulated desorption/reaction 39 8.3.2.1 High-Energy Radiation 40 8.3.2.2 IR-Visible-UV radiation 46 8.3.2.3 Ultrafast IR-Visible-UV radiation 49 8.3.3 Ablation 51 8.4 Charge transfer & electrochemistry 61 8.4.1 Homogeneous Electron Transfer 63 8.4.2 Corrections to and improvements on Marcus theory 68 8.4.3 Heterogeneous Electron Transfer 69 8.4.4 Current flow at a metal electrode 74 8.4.5 Advanced Topic: Semiconductor Photoelectrodes and the Grätzel Photovoltaic Cell 77 8.5 Tip induced process: Mechanisms of atom manipulation 83 8.5.1 Electric Field Effects 84 8.5.2 Tip Induced ESD 84 8.5.3 Vibrational Ladder Climbing 87 8.5.4 Pushing 90 8.5.5 Pulling 91 8.5.6 Atom Manipulation by Covalent Forces 91 8.6 Summary of Important Concepts 94 8.7 Frontiers and Challenges 96 8.8 Further Reading 97 8.9 Exercises 98 References 104

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of Contents1 The Role of Statistics in Engineering 1 1.1 The Engineering Method and Statistical Thinking 2 1.1.1 Variability 3 1.1.2 Populations and Samples 5 1.2 Collecting Engineering Data 5 1.2.1 Basic Principles 5 1.2.2 Retrospective Study 5 1.2.3 Observational Study 6 1.2.4 Designed Experiments 6 1.2.5 Observing Processes over Time 9 1.3 Mechanistic and Empirical Models 12 1.4 Probability and Probability Models 15 2 Probability 17 2.1 Sample Spaces and Events 18 2.1.1 Random Experiments 18 2.1.2 Sample Spaces 19 2.1.3 Events 21 2.2 Counting Techniques 23 2.3 Interpretations and Axioms of Probability 26 2.4 Unions of Events and Addition Rules 29 2.5 Conditional Probability 31 2.6 Intersections of Events and Multiplication and Total Probability Rules 34 2.7 Independence 36 2.8 Bayes’ Theorem 39 2.9 Random Variables 40 3 Discrete Random Variables and Probability Distributions 42 3.1 Probability Distributions and Probability Mass Functions 43 3.2 Cumulative Distribution Functions 45 3.3 Mean and Variance of a Discrete Random Variable 47 3.4 Discrete Uniform Distribution 49 3.5 Binomial Distribution 51 3.6 Geometric and Negative Binomial Distributions 55 3.7 Hypergeometric Distribution 59 3.8 Poisson Distribution 63 4 Continuous Random Variables and Probability Distributions 66 4.1 Probability Distributions and Probability Density Functions 67 4.2 Cumulative Distribution Functions 70 4.3 Mean and Variance of a Continuous Random Variable 71 4.4 Continuous Uniform Distribution 72 4.5 Normal Distribution 73 4.6 Normal Approximation to the Binomial and Poisson Distributions 79 4.7 Exponential Distribution 83 4.8 Erlang and Gamma Distributions 86 4.9 Weibull Distribution 89 4.10 Lognormal Distribution 90 4.11 Beta Distribution 92 5 Joint Probability Distributions 95 5.1 Joint Probability Distributions for Two Random Variables 96 5.2 Conditional Probability Distributions and Independence 102 5.3 Joint Probability Distributions for More Than Two Random Variables 107 5.4 Covariance and Correlation 110 5.5 Common Joint Distributions 113 5.5.1 Multinomial Probability Distribution 113 5.5.2 Bivariate Normal Distribution 115 5.6 Linear Functions of Random Variables 117 5.7 General Functions of Random Variables 120 5.8 Moment-Generating Functions 121 6 Descriptive Statistics 126 6.1 Numerical Summaries of Data 127 6.2 Stem-and-Leaf Diagrams 131 6.3 Frequency Distributions and Histograms 135 6.4 Box Plots 139 6.5 Time Sequence Plots 140 6.6 Scatter Diagrams 142 6.7 Probability Plots 144 7 Point Estimation of Parameters and Sampling Distributions 148 7.1 Point Estimation 149 7.2 Sampling Distributions and the Central Limit Theorem 150 7.3 General Concepts of Point Estimation 156 7.3.1 Unbiased Estimators 156 7.3.2 Variance of a Point Estimator 157 7.3.3 Standard Error: Reporting a Point Estimate 158 7.3.4 Bootstrap Standard Error 159 7.3.5 Mean Squared Error of an Estimator 160 7.4 Methods of Point Estimation 161 7.4.1 Method of Moments 162 7.4.2 Method of Maximum Likelihood 163 7.4.3 Bayesian Estimation of Parameters 167 8 Statistical Intervals for a Single Sample 170 8.1 Confidence Interval on the Mean of a Normal Distribution, Variance Known 172 8.1.1 Development of the Confidence Interval and Its Basic Properties 172 8.1.2 Choice of Sample Size 175 8.1.3 One-Sided Confidence Bounds 176 8.1.4 General Method to Derive a Confidence Interval 176 8.1.5 Large-Sample Confidence Interval for μ 177 8.2 Confidence Interval on the Mean of a Normal Distribution, Variance Unknown 179 8.2.1 t Distribution 180 8.2.2 t Confidence Interval on μ 181 8.3 Confidence Interval on the Variance and Standard Deviation of a Normal Distribution 182 8.4 Large-Sample Confidence Interval for a Population Proportion 185 8.5 Guidelines for Constructing Confidence Intervals 188 8.6 Bootstrap Confidence Interval 189 8.7 Tolerance and Prediction Intervals 189 8.7.1 Prediction Interval for a Future Observation 189 8.7.2 Tolerance Interval for a Normal Distribution 191 9 Tests of Hypotheses for a Single Sample 193 9.1 Hypothesis Testing 194 9.1.1 Statistical Hypotheses 194 9.1.2 Tests of Statistical Hypotheses 196 9.1.3 One-Sided and Two-Sided Hypotheses 202 9.1.4 P-Values in Hypothesis Tests 203 9.1.5 Connection between Hypothesis Tests and Confidence Intervals 206 9.1.6 General Procedure for Hypothesis Tests 206 9.2 Tests on the Mean of a Normal Distribution, Variance Known 208 9.2.1 Hypothesis Tests on the Mean 208 9.2.2 Type II Error and Choice of Sample Size 211 9.2.3 Large-Sample Test 215 9.3 Tests on the Mean of a Normal Distribution, Variance Unknown 215 9.3.1 Hypothesis Tests on the Mean 215 9.3.2 Type II Error and Choice of Sample Size 220 9.4 Tests on the Variance and Standard Deviation of a Normal Distribution 222 9.4.1 Hypothesis Tests on the Variance 222 9.4.2 Type II Error and Choice of Sample Size 224 9.5 Tests on a Population Proportion 225 9.5.1 Large-Sample Tests on a Proportion 225 9.5.2 Type II Error and Choice of Sample Size 227 9.6 Summary Table of Inference Procedures for a Single Sample 229 9.7 Testing for Goodness of Fit 229 9.8 Contingency Table Tests 232 9.9 Nonparametric Procedures 234 9.9.1 The Sign Test 235 9.9.2 The Wilcoxon Signed-Rank Test 239 9.9.3 Comparison to the t-Test 240 9.10 Equivalence Testing 240 9.11 Combining P-Values 242 10 Statistical Inference for Two Samples 244 10.1 Inference on the Difference in Means of Two Normal Distributions, Variances Known 245 10.1.1 Hypothesis Tests on the Difference in Means, Variances Known 247 10.1.2 Type II Error and Choice of Sample Size 249 10.1.3 Confidence Interval on the Difference in Means, Variances Known 251 10.2 Inference on the Difference in Means of Two Normal Distributions, Variances Unknown 253 10.2.1 Hypotheses Tests on the Difference in Means, Variances Unknown 253 10.2.2 Type II Error and Choice of Sample Size 259 10.2.3 Confidence Interval on the Difference in Means, Variances Unknown 260 10.3 A Nonparametric Test for the Difference in Two Means 261 10.3.1 Description of the Wilcoxon Rank-Sum Test 262 10.3.2 Large-Sample Approximation 263 10.3.3 Comparison to the t-Test 264 10.4 Paired t-Test 264 10.5 Inference on the Variances of Two Normal Distributions 268 10.5.1 F Distribution 268 10.5.2 Hypothesis Tests on the Equity of Two Variances 270 10.5.3 Type II Error and Choice of Sample Size 272 10.5.4 Confidence Interval on the Ratio of Two Variances 273 10.6 Inference on Two Population Proportions 273 10.6.1 Large-Sample Tests on the Difference in Population Proportions 274 10.6.2 Type II Error and Choice of Sample Size 276 10.6.3 Confidence Interval on the Difference in Population Proportions 277 10.7 Summary Table and Road Map for Inference Procedures for Two Samples 278 11 Simple Linear Regression and Correlation 280 11.1 Empirical Models 281 11.2 Simple Linear Regression 284 11.3 Properties of the Least Squares Estimators 288 11.4 Hypothesis Tests in Simple Linear Regression 288 11.4.1 Use of t-Tests 289 11.4.2 Analysis of Variance Approach to Test Significance of Regression 291 11.5 Confidence Intervals 292 11.5.1 Confidence Intervals on the Slope and Intercept 292 11.5.2 Confidence Interval on the Mean Response 293 11.6 Prediction of New Observations 295 11.7 Adequacy of the Regression Model 296 11.7.1 Residual Analysis 296 11.7.2 Coefficient of Determination (R2) 298 11.8 Correlation 299 11.9 Regression on Transformed Variables 303 11.10 Logistic Regression 305 12 Multiple Linear Regression 310 12.1 Multiple Linear Regression Model 311 12.1.1 Introduction 311 12.1.2 Least Squares Estimation of the Parameters 314 12.1.3 Matrix Approach to Multiple Linear Regression 316 12.1.4 Properties of the Least Squares Estimators 321 12.2 Hypothesis Tests in Multiple Linear Regression 322 12.2.1 Test for Significance of Regression 322 12.2.2 Tests on Individual Regression Coefficients and Subsets of Coefficients 325 12.3 Confidence Intervals in Multiple Linear Regression 329 12.3.1 Confidence Intervals on Individual Regression Coefficients 329 12.3.2 Confidence Interval on the Mean Response 330 12.4 Prediction of New Observations 331 12.5 Model Adequacy Checking 333 12.5.1 Residual Analysis 333 12.5.2 Influential Observations 335 12.6 Aspects of Multiple Regression Modeling 337 12.6.1 Polynomial Regression Models 337 12.6.2 Categorical Regressors and Indicator Variables 339 12.6.3 Selection of Variables and Model Building 341 12.6.4 Multicollinearity 349 13 Design and Analysis of Single-Factor Experiments: The Analysis of Variance 351 13.1 Designing Engineering Experiments 352 13.2 Completely Randomized Single-Factor Experiment 353 13.2.1 Example: Tensile Strength 353 13.2.2 Analysis of Variance 354 13.2.3 Multiple Comparisons Following the ANOVA 359 13.2.4 Residual Analysis and Model Checking 361 13.2.5 Determining Sample Size 363 13.3 The Random-Effects Model 365 13.3.1 Fixed Versus Random Factors 365 13.3.2 ANOVA and Variance Components 365 13.4 Randomized Complete Block Design 368 13.4.1 Design and Statistical Analysis 368 13.4.2 Multiple Comparisons 372 13.4.3 Residual Analysis and Model Checking 373 14 Design of Experiments with Several Factors 375 14.1 Introduction 376 14.2 Factorial Experiments 378 14.3 Two-Factor Factorial Experiments 382 14.3.1 Statistical Analysis 382 14.3.2 Model Adequacy Checking 386 14.3.3 One Observation per Cell 387 14.4 General Factorial Experiments 388 14.5 2k Factorial Designs 390 14.5.1 22 Design 390 14.5.2 2k Design for k ≥ 3 Factors 396 14.6 Single Replicate of the 2k Design 402 14.7 Addition of Center Points to a 2k Design 405 14.8 Blocking and Confounding in the 2k Design 408 14.9 One-Half Fraction of the 2k Design 413 14.10 Smaller Fractions: The 2k−p Fractional Factorial 418 14.11 Response Surface Methods and Designs 425 15 Statistical Quality Control 434 15.1 Quality Improvement and Statistics 435 15.1.1 Statistical Quality Control 436 15.1.2 Statistical Process Control 436 15.2 Introduction to Control Charts 436 15.2.1 Basic Principles 436 15.2.2 Design of a Control Chart 440 15.2.3 Rational Subgroups 441 15.2.4 Analysis of Patterns on Control Charts 442 15.3 X and R or S Control Charts 444 15.4 Control Charts for Individual Measurements 450 15.5 Process Capability 452 15.6 Attribute Control Charts 456 15.6.1 P Chart (Control Chart for Proportions) 456 15.6.2 U Chart (Control Chart for Defects per Unit) 458 15.7 Control Chart Performance 460 15.8 Time-Weighted Charts 462 15.8.1 Exponentially Weighted Moving-Average Control Chart 462 15.8.2 Cumulative Sum Control Chart 465 15.9 Other SPC Problem-Solving Tools 471 15.10 Decision Theory 473 15.10.1 Decision Models 473 15.10.2 Decision Criteria 474 15.11 Implementing SPC 476 APPENDIX A Statistical Tables and Charts A-3 Table I Summary of Common Probability Distributions A-4 Table II Cumulative Binomial Probabilities P(X ≤ x) A-5 Table III Cumulative Standard Normal Distribution A-8 Table IV Percentage Points χ2 α,v of the Chi-Squared Distribution A-10 Table V Percentage Points tα,v of the t Distribution A-11 Table VI Percentage Points fα,v1,v2 of the F Distribution A-12 Chart VII Operating Characteristic Curves A-17 Table VIII Critical Values for the Sign Test A-26 Table IX Critical Values for the Wilcoxon Signed-Rank Test A-26 Table X Critical Values for the Wilcoxon Rank-Sum Test A-27 Table XI Factors for Constructing Variables Control Charts A-28 Table XII Factors for Tolerance Intervals A-29 APPENDIX B Bibliography A-31 APPENDIX C Summary of Confidence Intervals and Hypothesis Testing Equations for One and Two Sample Applications A-33 GLOSSARY G-1 INDEX I-1

Read more less

Book SynopsisPRAISE FOR PRODUCT REALIZATION: GOING FROM ONE TO A MILLION A must-read reference for anyone who intends to successfully build a product and bring it to market. ?Desh Deshpande, Entrepreneur & Life Member of MIT Corporation This book is a go-to resource for new and experienced hardware teams to help them plan for and execute a new hardware startup successfully and avoid common pitfalls. Highly recommended. ?Bill Aulet, Managing Director, The Martin Trust Center for MIT Entrepreneurship & Professor of the Practice, MIT Sloan School and Author of Disciplined Entrepreneurship An excellent, practical guide for first time entrepreneurs building physical world products. ?Laila Partridge, Managing Director, STANLEY+Techstars Accelerator Product Realization picks up where so many product design books end. Here is the book that explains it all ? chock full of shop-floor wisdom, fascinating stories and compelling examplesTable of ContentsAcknowledgements xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Examples 2 1.2 Building Ten Thousand is Very Different from Building One 6 1.3 Product Realization is a Marathon 8 1.4 The Factory is Not a Giant 3D Printer 9 1.5 Three Rules 9 1.6 Why Learn about Product Realization? 10 1.7 Book Structure 12 Summary and Key Takeaways 15 2 Are You Ready to Start? 16 2.1 Is Your Concept Ready? 17 2.2 Is the Technology Mature Enough? 20 2.3 Is the Prototype Mature Enough? 21 2.4 Is the Product Definition Mature Enough? 22 2.5 Is Manufacturing Mature Enough? 24 2.6 Is there Enough Cash and Is there Enough Time? 25 2.7 How Ready is Ready? 27 Summary and Key Takeaways 28 3 Product Realization Process 29 3.1 Product Development Processes 30 3.2 Industry Standards 33 3.3 The Pilot Process 36 Summary and Key Takeaways 52 4 Project Management 53 4.1 Roles and Responsibilities 56 4.2 Critical Path 63 4.3 Risk Management 69 4.4 Managing Your Enterprise Data 74 Summary and Key Takeaways 79 5 Specifications 80 5.1 Integrating with the Product Development Process 83 5.2 Parts of the Specification Document 84 5.3 Gathering Information 89 5.4 Managing a Specifications Document 98 Summary and Key Takeaways 101 6 Product Definition 102 6.1 Types of Parts 105 6.2 Bill of Materials 114 6.3 Color, Material, and Finish (CMF) 123 6.4 Mechanical Drawing Package 126 6.5 Electronics Design Package 130 6.6 Packaging 131 Summary and Key Takeaways 137 7 Pilot-phase Quality Testing 138 7.1 Definition of Quality 140 7.2 Quality Testing 145 7.3 Pilot Quality Test Plan 149 Summary and Key Takeaways 176 8 Costs and Cash Flow 177 8.1 Terminology 179 8.2 Non-recurring Engineering Costs 183 8.3 Recurring Costs 188 8.4 Revenue and Order Fulfillment 203 8.5 Cash Flow 205 Summary and Key Takeaways 210 9 Manufacturing Systems 211 9.1 Production System Types 214 9.2 Dedicated Manufacturing Facilities 215 9.3 Areas in a Manufacturing Facility 220 9.4 Lean Principles 223 Summary and Key Takeaways 227 10 Design for Manufacturability and Design for X 228 10.1 Selecting Manufacturing Processes 230 10.2 Design for Manufacture 234 10.3 Design for Assembly 238 10.4 Design for Sustainability 240 10.5 Design for Maintenance 242 10.6 Design for Testing 244 10.7 Design for SKU Complexity 244 10.8 Eleven Basic Rules of DFX 245 Summary and Key Takeaways 251 11 Process Design 252 11.1 Process Flow 255 11.2 Manual vs. Automation 257 11.3 Work Allocation to Stations 258 11.4 Process Plans 259 11.5 Standard Operating Procedures 262 11.6 Material Handling 266 Summary and Key Takeaways 267 12 Tooling 268 12.1 Types and Their Uses 270 12.2 Tooling Strategy 277 12.3 Tooling Life-cycle 282 12.4 Tooling Plan 284 Summary and Key Takeaways 286 13 Production Quality 287 13.1 Measuring Quality 289 13.2 Tracking Quality 292 13.3 Production Quality Test Plan 296 13.4 Control Plans 303 Summary and Key Takeaways 306 14 Supply Chain 307 14.1 Make vs. Buy 309 14.2 Types of Supplier Relationships 310 14.3 Owning Manufacturing or Using a CM 314 14.4 Supplier Selection 319 14.5 Documents 322 14.6 Managing Your Supply Base 329 14.7 Single vs. Dual Sourcing 330 14.8 Touring a Factory 331 Summary and Key Takeaways 334 15 Production Planning 335 15.1 Production Planning Concepts 336 15.2 Forecast to Order Timeline 343 15.3 Complicating Factors 344 15.4 Shorter Lead Times are Better 349 Summary and Key Takeaways 350 16 Distribution 351 16.1 Distribution Process 353 16.2 Outsourcing Distribution 358 16.3 Distribution System Design 359 Summary and Key Takeaways 362 17 Certification and Labeling 363 17.1 Certifications 364 17.2 Labeling and Documentation 371 Summary and Key Takeaways 377 18 Customer Support 378 18.1 Warranty 381 18.2 Recall 383 18.3 Customer Support 385 18.4 Customer Support Data 393 Summary and Key Takeaways 399 19 Mass Production 400 19.1 Manufacturing Scalability 401 19.2 Continual Improvement 403 19.3 Cost Down 405 19.4 Auditing 408 19.5 Equipment Maintenance 409 19.6 Launching the Next Product 410 19.7 Conclusions 410 Summary and Key Takeaways 411 Glossary 412 Acronyms 428 References 431 Index 438

Read more less

Book SynopsisINTRODUCTION TO LOGISTICS SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT The updated new edition of the award-winning introductory textbook on logistics system management Introduction to Logistics Systems Management provides an in-depth introduction to the methodological aspects of planning, organization, and control of logistics for organizations in the private, public and non-profit sectors. Based on the authors' extensive teaching, research, and industrial consulting experience, this classic textbook is used in universities worldwide to teach students the use of quantitative methods for solving complex logistics problems. Fully updated and revised, the third edition places increased emphasis on the complexity and flexibility required by modern logistics systems. In this context, the extensive use of data, descriptive analytics, predictive models, and optimization techniques will be invaluable to support the decisions and actions of logistics and supply chain managers. Throughout the book, brand-new case studies and numerical examples illustrate how various methods can be used in industrial and service logistics to reduce costs and improve service levels. The book: includes new models and techniques that have emerged over the past decade; describes methodologies for logistics decision making, forecasting, logistics system design, procurement, warehouse management, and freight transportation management; includes end-of-chapter exercises, Microsoft Excel files and Python computer codes for each algorithm covered; includes access to a companion website with additional exercises, links to video tutorials, and supplementary teaching material. To facilitate creation of course material, additional LaTeX source data containing the formulae, optimization models, tables and algorithms described in the book is available to instructors. Introduction to Logistics Systems Management, Third Edition remains an essential textbook for senior undergraduate and graduate students in engineering, computer science, and management science courses. It is also a highly useful reference for academic researchers and industry practitioners alike.Table of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv Acknowledgements xvii About the Authors xviii List of Abbreviations xix 1 Introducing Logistics 1 1.1 Definition of Logistics 1 1.2 Logistics Systems 3 1.3 Supply Chains 5 1.3.1 Logistics Versus Supply Chain Management 5 1.3.2 A Taxonomy of Supply Chains 5 1.3.3 The Bullwhip Effect 6 1.4 Logistics Service Providers 8 1.5 Logistics in Service Organizations 9 1.5.1 Logistics in Solid Waste Management 9 1.5.2 Humanitarian Logistics 10 1.6 Case Studies 11 1.6.1 Apple 11 1.6.2 Adidas AG 13 1.6.3 Galbani 14 1.6.4 Pfizer 15 1.6.5 Amazon 18 1.6.6 FedEx 20 1.6.7 A.P. Moller-Maersk 21 1.6.8 Canadian Pacific Railway 23 1.7 Trends in Logistics 24 1.7.1 Reverse and Sustainable Logistics 24 1.7.2 E-commerce Logistics 26 1.7.3 City Logistics 28 1.8 Logistics Objectives and KPIs 30 1.8.1 Capital-related KPIs 30 1.8.2 Cost-related KPIs 31 1.8.3 Service Level-related KPIs 32 1.9 Logistics Management 36 1.9.1 Logistics Planning 37 1.9.2 Logistics Organizational Structures 37 1.9.3 Controlling 41 1.10 Data Analytics in Logistics 48 1.10.1 Descriptive Analytics 48 1.10.2 Predictive Analytics 49 1.10.3 Prescriptive Analytics 49 1.11 Segmentation Analysis 69 1.11.1 Customer Segmentation 69 1.11.2 Product Segmentation 70 1.12 Information Systems 73 1.13 Questions and Problems 75 2 Forecasting Logistics Data 83 2.1 Introduction 83 2.2 Qualitative Methods 84 2.3 Quantitative Methods 85 2.3.1 Explanatory Versus Extrapolation Methods 87 2.3.2 The Forecasting Process 87 2.4 Exploratory Data Analysis 88 2.4.1 The Univariate Case 88 2.4.2 Histograms 89 2.4.3 Boxplots 90 2.4.4 Time Series Plots 92 2.4.5 The Bivariate Case 92 2.4.6 Scatterplots 93 2.5 Data Preprocessing 93 2.5.1 Insertion of Missing Data 93 2.5.2 Detection of Outliers 95 2.5.3 Data Aggregation 96 2.5.4 Removing Calendar Variations 98 2.5.5 Deflating Monetary Time Series 99 2.5.6 Adjusting for Population Variations 101 2.5.7 Data Normalization 101 2.6 Classification of Time Series 102 2.7 Explanatory Methods 105 2.7.1 Forecasting with Regression 105 2.7.2 Multicollinearity 107 2.7.3 Categorical Predictors 107 2.7.4 Coefficient of Determination 108 2.7.5 Polynomial Regression 109 2.7.6 Linear–log, Log–linear and Log–log Regression Models 111 2.7.7 Underfitting and Overfitting 111 2.7.8 Forecasting with Machine Learning 113 2.8 Extrapolation Methods 118 2.8.1 Notation 118 2.8.2 Decomposition Method 119 2.8.3 Further Extrapolation Methods: the Constant-trend Case 127 2.8.4 Further Extrapolation Methods: the Linear-trend Case 132 2.8.5 Further Extrapolation Methods: the Seasonality Case 137 2.8.6 Further Extrapolation Methods: the Irregular Time Series Case 146 2.8.7 Further Extrapolation Methods: the Intermittent Time Series Case 148 2.9 Accuracy Measures 154 2.9.1 Calibration of the Parametrized Forecasting Methods 155 2.9.2 Selection of the Most Accurate Forecasting Method 157 2.10 Forecasting Control 158 2.10.1 Tracking Signal 158 2.10.2 Control Charts 159 2.11 Interval Forecasts 162 2.12 Case Study: Sales Forecasting at Shivoham 163 2.13 Case Study: Sales Forecasting at Orlea 164 2.14 Questions and Problems 165 3 Designing the Logistics Network 177 3.1 Introduction 177 3.2 Classification of Logistics Network Design Problems 178 3.3 The Number of Facilities in a Logistics System 181 3.4 Qualitative Versus Quantitative Location Methods 183 3.5 The Weighted Scoring Method 183 3.6 The Analytical Hierarchy Process 185 3.7 Single-commodity One-echelon Continuous Location Problems 190 3.8 Single-commodity Two-echelon Continuous Location Problems 197 3.9 Single-commodity One-echelon Discrete Location Problems 200 3.10 Single-commodity Two-echelon Discrete Location Problems 222 3.11 The Multi-commodity Case 226 3.12 Location-covering Problems 230 3.13 p-centre Problems 234 3.14 Data Aggregation 241 3.15 Location Models Under Uncertainty 244 3.15.1 A Stochastic Location–allocation Model 244 3.15.2 A Location-routing Model with Uncertain Demand 247 3.16 Case Study: Intermodal Container Depot Location at Hardcastle 251 3.17 Case Study: Location–Allocation Decisions at the Italian National Transplant Centre 254 3.18 Questions and Problems 256 4 Selecting the Suppliers 267 4.1 Introduction 267 4.2 Definition of the Set of Potential Suppliers 269 4.3 Definition of the Selection Criteria 270 4.4 Supplier Selection 274 4.5 Supplier Relationship Management Software 278 4.6 Case Study: the System for the Selection of Suppliers at Baxter 279 4.7 Case Study: the Supplier Selection at Onokar 282 4.8 Questions and Problems 284 5 Managing a Warehouse 290 5.1 Introduction 290 5.1.1 Warehouse Operations 290 5.1.2 Warehouse Functional Zones 292 5.1.3 Advantages of Warehousing 294 5.2 Types of Warehouses 294 5.2.1 Classification with Respect to the Position in the Logistics System 294 5.2.2 Classification with Respect to Ownership 296 5.2.3 Classification with Respect to Climate-control 297 5.2.4 Classification with Respect to the Level of Automation 297 5.3 Warehousing Costs 298 5.4 Unit Loads 300 5.4.1 Freight Classification 300 5.4.2 Unit Loads and Stock Keeping Units 301 5.4.3 Packaging 301 5.4.4 Palletized Unit Loads 302 5.4.5 Containerized Unit Loads 305 5.5 Storage Systems 307 5.5.1 Block Stacking 307 5.5.2 Pallet Racks 307 5.5.3 Shelves 311 5.5.4 Cabinet and Carousel Systems 313 5.6 Internal Transportation Systems 314 5.6.1 Manual Handling and Non-autonomous Vehicles 315 5.6.2 Automated Guided Vehicles 318 5.6.3 Stacker Cranes 320 5.6.4 Conveyors 321 5.7 Product Identification Systems 322 5.7.1 SKU Codes 322 5.7.2 Global Trade Item Numbers 323 5.7.3 Barcodes 323 5.7.4 QR Codes 325 5.7.5 Logistic Labels 325 5.7.6 Radio-frequency Identification 325 5.8 Warehouse Performance Measures 327 5.9 Warehouse Management Systems 333 5.10 Warehouse Design 335 5.10.1 Internal Transportation Technology Selection 336 5.10.2 Layout Design 337 5.10.3 Sizing of the Storage Zone 341 5.10.4 Sizing of the Receiving and Shipping Zones 348 5.10.5 Sizing of an AS/RS 349 5.10.6 Sizing a Vehicle-based Internal Transportation System 354 5.11 Storage Space Allocation 355 5.12 Inventory Management 360 5.12.1 Deterministic models 361 5.12.2 Stochastic Models 373 5.12.3 Selecting an Inventory Policy 380 5.12.4 Multiproduct Inventory Models 382 5.13 Crossdock Door Assignment Problem 387 5.14 Put-away and Order Picking Optimization 390 5.14.1 Parts-to-picker Systems 390 5.14.2 Picker-to-parts and AGV-based Systems 390 5.15 Load Consolidation 397 5.15.1 One-dimensional Bin Packing Problems 400 5.15.2 Two-dimensional Bin Packing Problems 403 5.15.3 Three-dimensional Bin Packing Problems 406 5.16 Case Study: Inventory Management at Wolferine 415 5.17 Case Study: Airplane Loading at FedEx 416 5.18 Questions and problems 418 6 Managing Freight Transportation 431 6.1 Introduction 431 6.2 Transportation Modes 431 6.2.1 Road Transportation 432 6.2.2 Water Transportation 434 6.2.3 Rail Transportation 437 6.2.4 Air Transportation 438 6.2.5 Pipeline Transportation 439 6.2.6 Intermodal Transportation 439 6.2.7 Comparison Among Transportation Modes 440 6.3 Freight Transportation Terminals 443 6.3.1 Port Terminals 444 6.3.2 Air Cargo Terminals 446 6.3.3 Rail Freight Terminals 448 6.3.4 Road Freight Terminals 449 6.4 Classification of Freight Transportation Management Problems 450 6.4.1 Long-haul Freight Transportation Management 450 6.4.2 Freight Transportation Terminal Management 451 6.4.3 Short-haul Freight Transportation Management 452 6.5 Transportation Management Systems 454 6.6 Freight Traffic Assignment Problems 455 6.6.1 Minimum-cost Flow Formulation 456 6.6.2 Linear Single-commodity Minimum-cost Flow Problems 458 6.6.3 Linear Multi-commodity Minimum-cost Flow Problems 465 6.7 Service Network Design Problems 471 6.8 Vehicle Allocation Problems 478 6.9 A Dynamic Driver Assignment Problem 481 6.10 Vehicle Fleet Composition 483 6.11 Shipment Consolidation 485 6.12 Vehicle Routing Problems 488 6.12.1 The Travelling Salesman Problem 491 6.12.2 The Node Routing Problem with Operational Constraints 506 6.12.3 The Node Routing and Scheduling Problem with Time Windows 519 6.12.4 Arc Routing Problems 530 6.12.5 Route Sequencing 540 6.13 Real-time Vehicle Routing Problems 541 6.14 Integrated Location and Routing Problems 543 6.15 Inventory Routing Problems 545 6.16 Case Study: Air Network Design at Intexpress 555 6.17 Case Study: Dynamic Vehicle-dispatching Problem with Pickups and Deliveries at eCourier 559 6.18 Questions and Problems 561 Index 572

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsTable of Contents: 1 Introduction and Preliminaries 1.1 A Thermodynamic System and the Control Volume 1.2 Macroscopic Versus Microscopic Points of View 1.3 Properties and State of a Substance 1.4 Processes and Cycles 1.5 Units for Mass, Length, Time, and Force 1.6 Specific Volume and Density 1.7 Pressure 1.8 Energy 1.9 Equality of Temperature 1.10 The Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics 1.11 Temperature Scales 1.12 Engineering Applications Summary Problems 2 Properties of a Pure Substance 2.1 The Pure Substance 2.2 The Phase Boundaries 2.3 The P–v–T Surface 2.4 Tables of Thermodynamic Properties 2.5 The Two-Phase States 2.6 The Liquid and Solid States 2.7 The Superheated Vapor States 2.8 The Ideal Gas States 2.9 The Compressibility Factor 2.10 Equations of State 2.11 Engineering Applications Summary Problems 3 Energy Equation and First Law of Thermodynamics 3.1 The Energy Equation 3.2 The First Law of Thermodynamics 3.3 The Definition of Work 3.4 Work Done at the Moving Boundary of a Simple Compressible System 3.5 Definition of Heat 3.6 Heat Transfer Modes 3.7 Internal Energy—A Thermodynamic Property 3.8 Problem Analysis and Solution Technique 3.9 The Thermodynamic Property Enthalpy 3.10 The Constant-Volume and Constant-Pressure Specific Heats 3.11 The Internal Energy, Enthalpy, and Specific Heat of Ideal Gases 3.12 Nonuniform Distribution of States and Mass 3.13 The Transient Heat Transfer Process 3.15 Engineering Applications Summary Problems 4 Energy Analysis for a Control Volume 4.1 Conservation of Mass and the Control Volume 4.2 The Energy Equation for a Control Volume 4.3 The Steady-State Process 4.4 Examples of Steady-State Processes 4.5 Multiple-Flow Devices 4.6 The Transient Flow Process 4.7 Engineering Applications Summary Problems 5 The Second Law of Thermodynamics 5.1 Heat Engines and Refrigerators, and Heat Pump 5.2 The Second Law of Thermodynamics 5.3 The Reversible Process 5.4 Factors That Render Processes Irreversible 5.5 The Carnot Cycle 5.6 Two Propositions Regarding the Efficiency of a Carnot Cycle 5.7 The Thermodynamic Temperature Scale 5.8 The Ideal Gas Temperature Scale 5.9 Ideal Versus Real Machines 5.10 The Inequality of Clausius 5.11 Engineering Applications Summary Problems 6 Entropy 6.1 Entropy—A Property of a System 6.2 The Entropy of a Pure Substance 6.3 Entropy Change in Reversible Processes 6.4 The Thermodynamic Property Relation 6.5 Entropy Change of a Solid Or Liquid 6.6 Entropy Change of an Ideal Gas 6.7 The Reversible Polytropic Process for an Ideal Gas 6.8 Entropy Change of a Control Mass During an Irreversible Process 6.9 Entropy Generation and the Entropy Equation 6.10 Principle of the Increase of Entropy 6.11 Entropy Balance Equation in a Rate Equation 6.12 Some General Comments About Entropy and Chaos Summary Problems 7 Entropy Analysis for a Control Volume 7.1 The Entropy Balance Equation for a Control Volume 7.2 The Steady-State Process and the Transient Process 7.3 The Steady-State Single-Flow Process 7.4 Principle of the Increase of Entropy 7.5 Engineering Applications; Energy Conservation and Device Efficiency Summary Problems 8 Exergy 8.1 Exergy, Reversible Work, and Irreversibility 8.2 Exergy and Its Balance Equation 8.3 The Second Law Efficiency 8.4 Engineering Applications Summary Problems 9 Gas Power and Refrigeration Systems 9.1 Introduction to Power Systems 9.2 Air-Standard Power Cycles 9.3 The Stirling Cycle and the Ericsson Cycles 9.4 Reciprocating Engine Power Cycles 9.5 The Otto Cycle 9.6 The Diesel Cycle 9.7 The Dual Cycle 9.8 The Atkinson and Miller Cycles 9.9 The Brayton Cycle 9.10 The Simple Gas-Turbine Cycle With a Regenerator 9.11 Gas-Turbine Power Cycle Configurations 9.12 The Air-Standard Cycle for Jet Propulsion 9.13 Introduction to Refrigeration Systems 9.14 The Air-Standard Refrigeration Cycle Summary Problems 10 Vapor Power and Refrigeration Systems 10.1 The Simple Rankine Cycle 10.2 Effect of Pressure and Temperature on the Rankine Cycle 10.3 The Reheat Cycle 10.4 The Regenerative Cycle and Feedwater Heaters 10.5 Deviation of Actual Cycles From Ideal Cycles 10.6 Combined Heat and Power: Other Configurations 10.7 The Vapor-Compression Refrigeration Cycle 10.8 Working Fluids for Vapor-Compression Refrigeration Systems 10.9 Deviation of the Actual Vapor-Compression Refrigeration Cycle From the Ideal Cycle 10.10 Refrigeration Cycle Configurations 10.11 The Absorption Refrigeration Cycle 10.12 Exergy Analysis of Cycles 10.13 Combined-Cycle Power and Refrigeration Systems Summary Problems 11 Gas Mixtures 11.1 General Considerations and Mixtures of Ideal Gases 11.2 A Simplified Model of a Mixture Involving Gases and a Vapor 11.3 The Energy Equation Applied To Gas–Vapor Mixtures 11.4 The Adiabatic Saturation Process 11.5 Engineering Applications—Wet-Bulb and Dry-Bulb Temperatures and the Psychrometric Chart Summary Problems 12 Thermodynamic Relations 12.1 The Clapeyron Equation 12.2 Mathematical Relations for a Homogeneous Phase 12.3 The Maxwell Relations 12.4 Thermodynamic Relations Involving Enthalpy, Internal Energy, and Entropy 12.5 Volume Expansivity and Isothermal and Adiabatic Compressibility 12.6 Real-Gas Behavior and Equations of State 12.7 The Generalized Chart for Changes of Enthalpy At Constant Temperature 12.8 The Generalized Chart for Changes of Entropy At Constant Temperature 12.9 The Property Relation for Mixtures 12.10 Pseudopure Substance Models for Real Gas Mixtures 12.11 Engineering Applications Summary Problems 13 Chemical Reactions 13.1 Fuels 13.2 The Combustion Process 13.3 Enthalpy of Formation 13.4 Energy Analysis of Reacting Systems 13.5 Enthalpy and Internal Energy of Combustion; Heating Value 13.6 Adiabatic Flame Temperature 13.7 The Third Law of Thermodynamics and Absolute Entropy 13.8 Second-Law Analysis of Reacting Systems 13.9 Fuel Cells 13.10 Engineering Applications Summary Problems 14 Introduction to Phase and Chemical Equilibrium 14.1 Requirements for Equilibrium 14.2 Equilibrium Between Two Phases of a Pure Substance 14.3 Metastable Equilibrium 14.4 Chemical Equilibrium 14.5 Simultaneous Reactions 14.6 Coal Gasification 14.7 Ionization 14.8 Engineering Applications Summary Problems 15 Compressible Flow 15.1 Stagnation Properties 15.2 The Momentum Equation for a Control Volume 15.3 Adiabatic, One-Dimensional, Steady-State Flow of an Incompressible Fluid Through a Nozzle 15.4 Velocity of Sound in an Ideal Gas 15.5 Reversible, Adiabatic, One-Dimensional Flow of an Ideal Gas Through a Nozzle 15.6 Mass-Flow Rate of an Ideal Gas Through an Isentropic Nozzle 15.7 Normal Shock in an Ideal Gas Flowing Through a Nozzle 15.8 Nozzle and Diffuser Coefficients Summary Problems Contents of Appendix Appendix A SI Units: Single-State Properties Appendix B SI Units: Thermodynamic Tables Appendix C Ideal Gas Specific Heat Appendix D Equations of State Appendix E Figures Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsList of Contributors xv Preface xvii Acknowledgments xix About the Companion Website xxi 1 Biomechanics as an Interdiscipline 1Stephen J. Thomas Joseph A. Zeni and David A. Winters 1.0 Introduction 1 1.0.1 Importance of Human Movement Analysis 1 1.0.2 The Interprofessional Team 2 1.1 Measurement Description Analysis and Assessment 2 1.1.1 Measurement Description and Monitoring 3 1.1.2 Analysis 4 1.1.3 Assessment and Interpretation 5 1.2 Biomechanics and its Relationship with Physiology and Anatomy 6 1.3 References 7 2 Signal Processing 8Joseph A. Zeni Stephen J. Thomas and David A. Winters 2.0 Introduction 8 2.1 Auto- and Cross-Correlation Analyses 8 2.1.1 Similarity to the Pearson Correlation 9 2.1.2 Formulae for Auto- and Cross-Correlation Coefficients 10 2.1.3 Four Properties of the Autocorrelation Function 11 2.1.4 Three Properties of the Cross-Correlation Function 14 2.1.5 Importance in Removing the Mean Bias from the Signal 15 2.1.6 Digital Implementation of Auto- and Cross-Correlation Functions 15 2.1.7 Application of Autocorrelations 16 2.1.8 Applications of Cross-Correlations 17 2.2 Frequency Analysis 19 2.2.1 Introduction – Time Domain vs. Frequency Domain 19 2.2.2 Discrete Fourier (Harmonic) Analysis 19 2.2.3 Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) 21 2.2.4 Applications of Spectrum Analyses 22 2.3 Ensemble Averaging of Repetitive Waveforms 29 2.3.1 Examples of Ensemble-Averaged Profiles 31 2.3.2 Normalization of Time Bases to 100% 31 2.3.3 Measure of Average Variability about the Mean Waveform 32 2.4 References 32 3 Kinematics 34Amy L. Lenz 3.0 Historical Development and Complexity of Problem 34 3.1 Kinematic Conventions 35 3.1.1 Absolute Spatial Reference System 35 3.1.2 Total Description of a Body Segment in Space 36 3.2 Direct Measurement Techniques 36 3.2.1 Goniometers 36 3.2.2 Accelerometers 38 3.2.3 Inertial Sensors 39 3.2.4 Special Joint Angle Measuring Systems 40 3.2.5 Electromagnetic Systems 41 3.3 Imaging Measurement Techniques 42 3.3.1 Review of Basic Lens Optics 42 3.3.2 f-Stop Setting and Field of Focus 43 3.3.3 Television Imaging Camera Historical Development 43 3.3.4 Optical Motion Capture 44 3.3.5 Optoelectric Techniques 47 3.3.6 Biplane Fluoroscopy 48 3.3.7 Markerless Systems 51 3.3.8 Summary of Various Kinematic Systems 51 3.4 Clinical Measures of Kinematics 52 3.4.1 2-D Kinematic Apps/Sensors 52 3.4.2 Sensor-Based Systems 52 3.5 Processing of Raw Kinematic Data 52 3.5.1 Nature of Unprocessed Image Data 52 3.5.2 Signal Versus Noise in Kinematic Data 53 3.5.3 Problems of Calculating Velocities and Accelerations 54 3.5.4 Smoothing and Curve Fitting of Data 54 3.5.5 Comparison of Some Smoothing Techniques 60 3.6 Calculation of Other Kinematic Variables 62 3.6.1 Limb-Segment Angles 62 3.6.2 Joint Angles 63 3.6.3 Velocities – Linear and Angular 63 3.6.4 Accelerations – Linear and Angular 63 3.7 Problems Based on Kinematic Data 64 3.8 References 65 4 Anthropometry 67Joseph A. Zeni Stephen J. Thomas and David A. Winters 4.0 Scope of Anthropometry in Movement Biomechanics 67 4.0.1 Segment Dimensions 67 4.1 Density Mass and Inertial Properties 68 4.1.1 Whole-Body Density 68 4.1.2 Segment Densities 69 4.1.3 Segment Mass and Center of Mass 69 4.1.4 Center of Mass of a Multisegment System 72 4.1.5 Mass Moment of Inertia and Radius of Gyration 73 4.1.6 Parallel Axis Theorem 74 4.1.7 Use of Anthropometric Tables and Kinematic Data 75 4.2 Direct Experimental Measures 78 4.2.1 Location of the Anatomical Center of Mass of the Body 79 4.2.2 Calculation of the Mass of a Distal Segment 79 4.2.3 Moment of Inertia of a Distal Segment 80 4.2.4 Joint Axes of Rotation 81 4.3 Muscle Anthropometry 82 4.3.1 Cross-Sectional Area of Muscles 82 4.3.2 Change in Muscle Length During Movement 83 4.3.3 Force per Unit Cross-Sectional Area (Stress) 84 4.3.4 Mechanical Advantage of Muscle 84 4.3.5 Multijoint Muscles 85 4.4 Problems Based on Anthropometric Data 86 4.5 References 87 5 Kinetics: Forces and Moments of Force 89Stephen J. Thomas Joseph A. Zeni and David A. Winters 5.0 Biomechanical Models 89 5.0.1 Link-Segment Model Development 89 5.0.2 Forces Acting on the Link-Segment Model 90 5.0.3 Joint Reaction Forces and Bone-on-Bone Forces 91 5.1 Basic Link-Segment Equations – The Free-Body Diagram 93 5.2 Force Transducers and Force Plates 98 5.2.1 Multidirectional Force Transducers 98 5.2.2 Force Plates 99 5.2.3 Combined Force Plate and Kinematic Data 104 5.2.4 Interpretation of Moment-of-Force Curves 105 5.2.5 Differences Between Center of Mass and Center of Pressure 107 5.2.6 Kinematics and Kinetics of the Inverted Pendulum Model 108 5.3 Bone-on-bone Forces During Dynamic Conditions 110 5.3.1 Indeterminacy in Muscle Force Estimates 110 5.3.2 Example Problem 111 5.4 References 114 6 Mechanical Work Energy and Power 115Joseph A. Zeni Stephen J. Thomas and David A. Winters 6.0 Introduction 115 6.0.1 Mechanical Energy and Work 115 6.0.2 Law of Conservation of Energy 116 6.0.3 Internal Versus External Work 116 6.0.4 Positive Work of Muscles 118 6.0.5 Negative Work of Muscles 118 6.0.6 Muscle Mechanical Power 119 6.0.7 Mechanical Work of Muscles 119 6.0.8 Mechanical Work Done on an External Load 120 6.0.9 Mechanical Energy Transfer Between Segments 122 6.1 Efficiency 123 6.1.1 Causes of Inefficient Movement 124 6.1.2 Summary of Energy Flows 127 6.2 Forms of Energy Storage 128 6.2.1 Energy of a Body Segment and Exchanges of Energy Within the Segment 129 6.2.2 Total Energy of a Multisegment System 132 6.3 Calculation of Internal and External Work 133 6.3.1 Internal Work Calculation 133 6.3.2 External Work Calculation 136 6.4 Power Balances at Joints and Within Segments 136 6.4.1 Energy Transfer via Muscles 137 6.4.2 Power Balance Within Segments 138 6.5 Problems Based on Kinetic and Kinematic Data 141 6.6 References 143 7 Understanding 3D Kinematic and Kinetic Variables 145Thomas Hulcher 7.0 Introduction 145 7.1 Axes Systems 145 7.1.1 Global Reference System 145 7.1.2 Local Reference Systems and Rotation of Axes 146 7.1.3 Other Possible Rotation Sequences 147 7.1.4 Dot and Cross Products 148 7.2 Marker and Anatomical Axes Systems 148 7.2.1 Markerset Design 150 7.2.2 Event Detection Methods for Gait 152 7.2.3 Event Detection Methods for Other Activities 153 7.2.4 Considerations for Applications with Implements 153 7.2.5 Example of a Kinematic Data Set 154 7.3 Determination of Segment Angular Velocities and Accelerations 158 7.4 Kinetic Analysis of Reaction Forces and Moments 162 7.4.1 Newtonian Three-Dimensional Equations of Motion for a Segment 162 7.4.2 Euler’s Three-Dimensional Equations of Motion for a Segment 163 7.4.3 Example of a Kinetic Data Set 164 7.4.4 Joint Mechanical Powers 167 7.4.5 Induced Acceleration Analysis 167 7.4.6 Sample Moment and Power Curves 168 7.5 Suggested Further Reading 170 7.6 References 170 8 Muscle Mechanics 171Stephen J. Thomas Joseph A. Zeni and David A. Winters 8.0 Introduction 171 8.0.1 The Motor Unit 171 8.0.2 Recruitment of Motor Units 172 8.0.3 Size Principle 173 8.0.4 Types of Motor Units – Fast- and Slow-Twitch Classification 174 8.0.5 The Muscle Twitch 175 8.0.6 Shape of Graded Contractions 176 8.1 Force–Length Characteristics of Muscles 177 8.1.1 Force–Length Curve of the Contractile Element 177 8.1.2 Influence of Parallel Connective Tissue 178 8.1.3 Series Elastic Tissue 178 8.1.4 In Vivo Force–Length Measures 180 8.2 Force–Velocity Characteristics 181 8.2.1 Concentric Contractions 181 8.2.2 Eccentric Contractions 183 8.2.3 Combination of Length and Velocity Versus Force 183 8.2.4 Combining Muscle Characteristics with Load Characteristics: Equilibrium 184 8.3 Technique to Measure in Vivo Tendon Mechanical Properties 186 8.3.1 Ankle Joint Moment 186 8.3.2 Tendon Mechanical Properties 187 8.4 References 187 9 Kinesiological Electromyography 189Joseph A. Zeni Stephen J. Thomas and David A. Winters 9.0 Introduction 189 9.1 Electrophysiology of Muscle Contraction 189 9.1.1 Motor End Plate 189 9.1.2 Sequence of Chemical Events Leading to a Twitch 190 9.1.3 Generation of a Muscle Action Potential 190 9.1.4 Duration of the Motor Unit Action Potential 192 9.1.5 Detection of Motor Unit Action Potentials from Electromyogram During Graded Contractions 194 9.2 Recording of the Electromyogram 195 9.2.1 Amplifier Gain 196 9.2.2 Input Impedance 196 9.2.3 Frequency Response 197 9.2.4 Common-Mode Rejection 199 9.2.5 Cross-Talk in Surface Electromyograms 202 9.2.6 Recommendations for Surface Electromyogram Reporting and Electrode Placement Procedures 205 9.3 Processing of the Electromyogram 205 9.3.1 Full-Wave Rectification 206 9.3.2 Linear Envelope 207 9.3.3 True Mathematical Integrators 208 9.4 Relationship Between Electromyogram and Biomechanical Variables 208 9.4.1 Electromyogram Versus Isometric Tension 209 9.4.2 Electromyogram During Muscle Shortening and Lengthening 210 9.4.3 Electromyogram Changes During Fatigue 211 9.5 References 212 10 Modeling of Human Movement 215Brian A. Knarr Todd J. Leutzinger and Namwoong Kim 10.0 Introduction 215 10.1 Review of Forward Solution Models 216 10.1.1 Assumptions and Constraints of Forward Solution Models 217 10.1.2 Potential of Forward Solution Simulations 217 10.2 Muscle-Actuated Simulation of Movement 218 10.2.1 Musculoskeletal Modeling 218 10.2.2 Control 221 10.2.3 OpenSim 223 10.2.4 EMG-Driven Modeling 227 10.3 Model Validation 230 10.4 References 231 11 Static and Dynamic Balance 235Stephen J. Thomas Joseph A. Zeni and David A. Winters 11.0 Introduction 235 11.1 The Support Moment Synergy 236 11.1.1 Relationship Between Ms and the Vertical Ground Reaction Force 237 11.2 Medial/Lateral and Anterior/Posterior Balance in Standing 239 11.2.1 Quiet Standing 239 11.2.2 Medial Lateral Balance Control During Workplace Tasks 240 11.3 Dynamic Balance During Walking 241 11.3.1 The Human Inverted Pendulum in Steady State Walking 241 11.3.2 Initiation of Gait 242 11.3.3 Gait Termination 244 11.4 References 246 12 Central Nervous System’s Role in Biomechanics 247Alan R. Needle and Christopher J. Burcal 12.0 Introduction 247 12.1 Central Nervous System and Volitional Control of Movement 247 12.1.1 Key Structures for Movement 247 12.1.2 Synapses and Neurotransmitters 249 12.1.3 CNS Adaptations 249 12.2 Peripheral Nervous System and Reflexive Control of Movement 250 12.2.1 Sensory Receptors and Motor Units 252 12.3 Methodologies to Understand Central Nervous System Function 253 12.3.1 Functional Magnetic Resonance Imaging (fMRI) 253 12.3.2 Electroencephalography (EEG) 257 12.3.3 Neural Excitability 265 12.4 Peripheral Nervous System Measurement Techniques 269 12.4.1 Nerve Conduction Studies 269 12.4.2 Microneurography 271 12.5 Methodologies to Understand Central Nervous System Behavior and Environmental Interactions 271 12.5.1 Virtual Reality 271 12.6 Nervous System Role in Muscle Synergies 274 12.6.1 Measurement Techniques and Experimental Setup 274 12.6.2 Analysis Techniques 275 12.7 The Central Nervous System and Learning and Injury 276 12.7.1 Translation of Synaptic Plasticity to Motor Learning 276 12.7.2 Role of Pathology on the Central Nervous System 276 12.8 References 278 13 A Case-Based Approach to Interpreting Biomechanical Data 281Ankur Padhye John D. Willson Joseph A. Zeni Kristen F. Nicholson and Garrett S. Bullock 13.0 Patellofemoral Pain 281 13.0.1 Introduction 281 13.0.2 Case Description 281 13.0.3 Patient Examination 282 13.0.4 Gait Analysis 282 13.0.5 Interpretations and Intervention 282 13.0.6 Patient Outcomes and Discussion 283 13.0.7 Conclusion 284 13.0.8 References 284 13.1 Biomechanical Approach to Manage Knee Osteoarthritis 284 13.1.1 Osteoarthritis and Biomechanics 284 13.1.2 Patient History 286 13.1.3 Biomechanical Assessment 286 13.1.4 References 288 13.2 Ulnar Collateral Ligament Reconstruction 288 13.2.1 Player History 289 13.2.2 References 293 APPENDICES A. Kinematic Kinetic and Energy Data 295 Figure A.1 Walking Trial – Marker Locations and Mass and Frame Rate Information 295 Table A.1 Raw Coordinate Data (cm) 296 Table A.2(a) Filtered Marker Kinematics – Rib Cage and Greater Trochanter (Hip) 300 Table A.2(b) Filtered Marker Kinematics – Femoral Lateral Epicondyle (Knee) and Head of Fibula 304 Table A.2(c) Filtered Marker Kinematics – Lateral Malleolus (Ankle) and Heel 308 Table A.2(d) Filtered Marker Kinematics – Fifth Metatarsal and Toe 312 Table A.3(a) Linear and Angular Kinematics – Foot 316 Table A.3(b) Linear and Angular Kinematics – Leg 320 Table A.3(c) Linear and Angular Kinematics – Thigh 324 Table A.3(d) Linear and Angular Kinematics – ½ HAT 328 Table A.4 Relative Joint Angular Kinematics – Ankle Knee and Hip 332 Table A.5(a) Reaction Forces and Moments of Force – Ankle and Knee 336 Table A.5(b) Reaction Forces and Moments of Force – Hip 340 Table A.6 Segment Potential Kinetic and Total Energies – Foot Leg Thigh and ½ HAT 344 Table A.7 Power Generation/Absorption and Transfer – Ankle Knee and Hip 348 B. Units and Definitions Related to Biomechanical and Electromyographical Measurements 351 Table B.1 Base SI Units 351 Table B.2 Derived SI Units 352 Index 355

Read more less

Book SynopsisWELDING ENGINEERING The new edition of the popular welding engineering textbook includes brand-new topics, assignments, and review questions Welding Engineering: An Introduction provides a clear and accessible overview of the concepts, tools, materials, and methods of modern welding and joining technology. With emphasis on fundamental engineering principles, this comprehensive textbook offers easy-to-understand coverage of a wide range of key topics in welding engineering, from the basics of arc welding processes to welding metallurgy, design, and safety. Concise chapters offer numerous figures, tables, images, and recommended readings to promote reader comprehension of the material. Now in its second edition, the text contains fully revised content throughout, including entirely new sections on additive manufacturing and computational modeling of welds. Updated and expanded chapters address modern arc welding power supply technology, resistance, solid-state, and high energy density welding processes, weld inspection methods, codes and standards, welding of high strength steels, and more. This edition features simple yet effective end-of-chapter assignments that enhance students' learning and assist instructors in developing assessment questions for their course. The second edition of Welding Engineering: Provides up-to-date coverage of rapidly growing techniques and technologies within the field Features new assignments and true/false questions at the end of each chapter Explains the essential concepts and principles necessary for more in-depth courses in welding, metallurgy, and design Covers all the major welding processes used in manufacturing and fabrication Welding Engineering: An Introduction, Second Edition is an excellent textbook for undergraduate and graduate welding engineering courses taught within four-year engineering degree programs, and a valuable guide for engineers and professionals in the manufacturing industry who need to learn fundamental welding engineering concepts for their job roles.Table of ContentsPreface xiii About the Companion Website xv 1 What Is Welding Engineering? 1 1.1 Introduction to Welding Processes 1 2 Arc Welding Processes 3 2.1 Fundamentals and Principles of Arc Welding 3 2.1.1 Fundamentals of an Electric Arc 5 2.1.2 Arc Voltage 6 2.1.3 Polarity 7 2.1.4 Heat Input 9 2.1.5 Welding Position 10 2.1.6 Filler Metals and Electrodes 11 2.1.7 Shielding 11 2.1.7.1 Gas Shielding 11 2.1.7.2 Flux Shielding 12 2.1.8 Weld Joints and Weld Types for Arc Welding 13 2.1.9 Primary Operating Variables in Arc Welding 14 2.1.9.1 Voltage 14 2.1.9.2 Current 14 2.1.9.3 Electrode Feed Rate/Wire Feed Speed 15 2.1.9.4 Welding Travel Speed 15 2.1.10 Metal Transfer Mode 16 2.1.11 Arc Blow 16 2.1.12 Common Arc Welding Defects and Discontinuities 17 2.2 Arc Welding Power Supplies 17 2.2.1 Transformers 18 2.2.2 Generators 18 2.2.3 Important Electrical Elements in Arc Welding Power Supplies 20 2.2.4 Volt-Ampere Characteristic of Arc Welding Power Supplies 23 2.2.5 Duty Cycle 26 2.2.6 Modern Advanced Arc Welding Power Supplies 27 2.3 Shielded Metal Arc Welding 30 2.4 Gas Tungsten Arc Welding 36 2.5 Plasma Arc Welding 44 2.6 Gas Metal Arc Welding 47 2.7 Flux Cored Arc Welding 55 2.8 Submerged Arc Welding 58 2.9 Other Arc Welding Processes 63 2.9.1 Electrogas Welding 63 2.9.2 Electroslag Welding 63 2.9.3 Arc Stud Welding 65 2.10 Test Your Knowledge 68 3 Resistance Welding Processes 69 3.1 Fundamentals and Principles of Resistance Welding Processes 69 3.1.1 Resistance and Resistivity 69 3.1.2 Current Range and Lobe Curves 72 3.1.3 Modern Equipment and Power Supplies 74 3.2 Resistance Spot Welding 75 3.3 Resistance Seam Welding 79 3.4 Resistance Projection Welding 81 3.5 High Frequency Welding 83 3.6 Flash Welding 85 3.7 Test Your Knowledge 88 4 Solid-State Welding Processes 91 4.1 Fundamentals and Principles of Solid-State Welding 91 4.1.1 Solid-State Welding Theory 91 4.1.2 Roll Bonding Theory 92 4.2 Friction Welding Processes 93 4.2.1 Inertia Friction Welding 94 4.2.2 Continuous Drive Friction Welding 96 4.2.3 Linear Friction Welding 97 4.2.4 Friction Stir Welding 98 4.3 Other Solid-State Welding Processes 101 4.3.1 Diffusion Welding 101 4.3.2 Explosion Welding 104 4.3.3 Ultrasonic Welding 106 4.4 Test Your Knowledge 110 5 High-Energy Density Welding Processes 111 5.1 Fundamentals and Principles of High-Energy Density Welding 111 5.1.1 Power Density 111 5.1.2 Keyhole Mode Welding 113 5.2 Laser Beam Welding 113 5.3 Electron Beam Welding 116 5.4 Test Your Knowledge 118 6 Other Approaches to Welding and Joining 121 6.1 Brazing and Soldering 121 6.2 Welding of Plastics 123 6.2.1 Hot Tool (Plate) Welding 124 6.2.2 Hot Gas Welding 125 6.2.3 Implant Induction Welding 126 6.2.4 Ultrasonic Welding 126 6.2.5 Vibration Welding 127 6.3 Adhesive Bonding 128 6.4 Novel and Hybrid Welding Processes 128 6.5 Additive Manufacturing 131 6.6 Oxyfuel Welding and Cutting 132 6.7 Other Cutting Processes 137 6.7.1 Plasma Cutting 137 6.7.2 Laser Beam Cutting 138 6.7.3 Air Carbon Arc Gouging 138 6.8 Test Your Knowledge 140 7 Design Considerations for Welding 141 7.1 Introduction to Welding Design 141 7.2 Mechanical Properties 141 7.2.1 Yield Strength 141 7.2.2 Tensile Strength 142 7.2.3 Ductility 142 7.2.4 Fatigue Strength 142 7.2.5 Toughness 142 7.2.6 Mechanical Properties—Effect of Temperature 144 7.3 Physical Properties 144 7.3.1 Thermal Conductivity 144 7.3.2 Melting Temperature 144 7.3.3 Coefficient of Thermal Expansion 145 7.3.4 Electrical Conductivity 145 7.4 Design Elements for Welded Connections 145 7.4.1 Joint and Weld Types 145 7.4.2 Joint and Weld Type Selection Considerations 148 7.4.3 Weld Joint Nomenclature—Groove Welds 150 7.4.4 Weld Joint Nomenclature—Fillet Welds 151 7.4.5 Welding Positions 151 7.5 Welding Symbols 154 7.6 Weld Sizing 159 7.7 Computational Modeling of Welds 162 7.8 Test Your Knowledge 164 8 Heat Flow, Residual Stress, and Distortion 165 8.1 Heat Flow 165 8.2 Fundamentals and Principles of Residual Stress and Distortion 169 8.3 Approaches to Minimizing or Eliminating Distortion 172 8.4 Test Your Knowledge 176 9 Welding Metallurgy 177 9.1 Introduction to Welding Metallurgy 177 9.2 The Fusion Zone 179 9.3 The Partially Melted Zone 180 9.4 The Heat‐Affected Zone (HAZ) 182 9.5 Introduction to Phase Diagrams 183 9.6 Test Your Knowledge 186 10 Welding Metallurgy of Carbon Steels 187 10.1 Introduction to Steels 187 10.2 Steel Microstructures and the Iron-Iron Carbide Diagram 189 10.3 Continuous Cooling Transformation (CCT) Diagrams 193 10.4 Hardness and Hardenability 196 10.5 Hydrogen Cracking 198 10.6 Heat-Affected Zone Microstructures in Steel 200 10.7 Advanced High-Strength Steels 202 10.8 Test Your Knowledge 204 11 Welding Metallurgy of Stainless Steels 207 11.1 Introduction to Stainless Steels 207 11.2 Constitution Diagrams 208 11.3 Martensitic Stainless Steels 210 11.4 Ferritic Stainless Steels 211 11.5 Austenitic Stainless Steels 214 11.6 Duplex Stainless Steels 218 11.7 Precipitation-Hardening Stainless Steels 220 11.8 Test Your Knowledge 220 12 Welding Metallurgy of Nonferrous Alloys 223 12.1 Aluminum Alloys 223 12.2 Nickel-Based Alloys 227 12.3 Titanium Alloys 231 12.4 Copper Alloys 234 12.5 Magnesium Alloys 235 12.6 Test Your Knowledge 237 13 Weld Quality 239 13.1 Weld Discontinuities and Defects 239 13.2 Mechanical Testing of Weldments 240 13.2.1 Tensile Testing 240 13.2.2 Ductility Testing 241 13.2.3 Toughness Testing 243 13.2.4 Fatigue Testing 244 13.3 Nondestructive Testing 248 13.3.1 Visual Examination 249 13.3.2 Liquid Penetrant Testing 249 13.3.3 Magnetic Particle Testing 250 13.3.4 Radiographic Testing 252 13.3.5 Ultrasonic Testing 254 13.4 Introduction to Fractography 255 13.5 Test Your Knowledge 258 14 Codes, Standards, and Welding Qualification 259 14.1 Introduction to Standards 259 14.2 AWS D1.1—“Structural Welding Code—Steel” 265 14.2.1 Welding and Welder Qualification 265 14.2.2 Fabrication and Inspection 272 14.3 Test Your Knowledge 272 15 Safe Practices in Welding 275 15.1 Electrical Shock 275 15.2 Radiation 275 15.3 Burns 275 15.4 Smoke and Fumes 276 15.5 Welding in Confined Space 276 15.6 Fire and Explosion Danger 276 15.7 Compressed Gasses 276 15.8 Hazardous Materials 277 15.9 Test Your Knowledge 277 Index 279

Read more less

Book SynopsisMechanics of Materials presents the theory and practice of mechanics of materials in a straight-forward, student-friendly manner that addresses the learning styles of today''s students without sacrificing rigor or depth in the presentation of topics. From basic concepts of stress and strain to more advanced topics like beam deflections and combined loads, this book provides students with everything they need to embark on successful careers in materials and mechanical engineering. Laying an emphasis on critical thinking forms, this text focuses on helping learners develop practical skills, encouraging them to recognize fundamental concepts relevant to specific situations, identify equations needed to solve problems, and engage with literature in the field. This International Adaptation has been thoroughly updated to use SI units. This edition strengthens the coverage by including methods such as moment area method and conjugate beam method for calculating deflectTable of Contents1 Stress 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Normal Stress Under Axial Loading 2 1.3 Direct Shear Stress 8 1.4 Bearing Stress 14 1.5 Stresses on Inclined Sections 18 1.6 Equality of Shear Stresses on Perpendicular Planes 20 2 Strain 31 2.1 Displacement, Deformation, and the Concept of Strain 31 2.2 Normal Strain 32 2.3 Shear Strain 37 2.4 Thermal Strain 41 3 Mechanical Properties of Materials 49 3.1 The Tension Test 49 3.2 The Stress-Strain Diagram 52 3.3 Hooke's Law 61 3.4 Poisson's Ratio 62 4 Design Concepts 77 4.1 Introduction 77 4.2 Types of Loads 78 4.3 Safety 79 4.4 Allowable Stress Design 80 4.5 Load and Resistance Factor Design 87 5 Axial Deformation 97 5.1 Introduction 97 5.2 Saint-Venant's Principle 98 5.3 Deformations in Axially Loaded Bars 100 5.4 Deformations in a System of Axially Loaded Bars 107 5.5 Statically Indeterminate Axially Loaded Members 114 5.6 Thermal Effects on Axial Deformation 125 5.7 Stress Concentrations 132 6 Torsion 149 6.1 Introduction 149 6.2 Torsional Shear Strain 151 6.3 Torsional Shear Stress 152 6.4 Stresses on Oblique Planes 154 6.5 Torsional Deformations 156 6.6 Torsion Sign Conventions 158 6.7 Gears in Torsion Assemblies 167 6.8 Power Transmission 172 6.9 Statically Indeterminate TorsionMembers 176 6.10 Stress Concentrations in Circular Shafts Under Torsional Loadings 188 6.11 Torsion of Noncircular Sections 191 6.12 Torsion of Thin-Walled Tubes: Shear Flow 195 7 Equilibrium of Beams 209 7.1 Introduction 209 7.2 Shear and Moment in Beams 211 7.3 Graphical Method for Constructing Shear and Moment Diagrams 222 7.4 Discontinuity Functions to Represent Load, Shear, and Moment 239 8 Bending 257 8.1 Introduction 257 8.2 Flexural Strains 259 8.3 Normal Stresses in Beams 260 8.4 Analysis of Bending Stresses in Beams 272 8.5 Introductory Beam Design for Strength 279 8.6 Flexural Stresses in Beams of Two Materials 284 8.7 Bending Due to an Eccentric Axial Load 295 8.8 Unsymmetric Bending 301 8.9 Stress Concentrations Under Flexural Loadings 311 8.10 Bending of Curved Bars 314 9 Shear Stress In Beams 339 9.1 Introduction 339 9.2 Resultant Forces Produced by Bending Stresses 339 9.3 The Shear Stress Formula 344 9.4 The First Moment of Area, Q 350 9.5 Shear Stresses in Beams of Rectangular Cross Section 352 9.6 Shear Stresses in Beams of Circular Cross Section 357 9.7 Shear Stresses in Beams of Triangular Cross Section 359 9.8 Shear Stresses in Webs of Flanged Beams 363 9.9 Shear Flow in Built-Up Members 366 9.10 Shear Stress and Shear Flow in Thin-Walled Members 375 9.11 Shear Centers of Thin-Walled Open Sections 393 10 Beam Deflections 421 10.1 Introduction 421 10.2 Moment-Curvature Relationship 422 10.3 The Differential Equation of the Elastic Curve 422 10.4 Determining Deflections by Integration of a Moment Equation 426 10.5 Determining Deflections by Integration of Shear-Force or Load Equations 438 10.6 Determining Deflections by Using Discontinuity Functions 441 10.7 Determining Deflections by the Method of Superposition 448 10.8 Determining Deflections by Using Moment Area Method 464 10.9 Determining Deflections by Using Conjugate Beam Method 466 11 Statically Indeterminate Beams 483 11.1 Introduction 483 11.2 Types of Statically Indeterminate Beams 483 11.3 The Integration Method 485 11.4 Use of Discontinuity Functions for Statically Indeterminate Beams 491 11.5 The Superposition Method 496 12 Stress Transformations 519 12.1 Introduction 519 12.2 Stress at a General Point in an Arbitrarily Loaded Body 519 12.3 Equilibrium of the Stress Element 522 12.4 Plane Stress 523 12.5 Generating the Stress Element 524 12.6 Equilibrium Method for Plane Stress Transformations 527 12.7 General Equations of Plane Stress Transformation 530 12.8 Principal Stresses and Maximum Shear Stress 536 12.9 Presentation of Stress Transformation Results 543 12.10 Mohr's Circle for Plane Stress 550 12.11 General State of Stress at a Point 566 13 Strain Transformations 587 13.1 Introduction 587 13.2 Plane Strain 588 13.3 Transformation Equations for Plane Strain 589 13.4 Principal Strains and Maximum Shearing Strain 593 13.5 Presentation of Strain Transformation Results 594 13.6 Mohr's Circle for Plane Strain 598 13.7 Strain Measurement and Strain Rosettes 600 14 Pressure Vessels 609 14.1 Introduction 609 14.2 Thin-Walled Spherical Pressure Vessels 610 14.3 Thin-Walled Cylindrical Pressure Vessels 613 14.4 Strains in Thin-Walled Pressure Vessels 617 14.5 Stresses in Thick-Walled Cylinders 619 14.6 Deformations in Thick-Walled Cylinders 627 14.7 Interference Fits 630 15 Combined Loads 641 15.1 Introduction 641 15.2 Combined Axial and Torsional Loads 641 15.3 Principal Stresses in a Flexural Member 644 15.4 General Combined Loadings 653 15.5 Theories of Failure 669 16 Columns 691 16.1 Introduction 691 16.2 Buckling of Pin-Ended Columns 694 16.3 The Effect of End Conditions on Column Buckling 702 16.4 The Secant Formula 712 16.5 Empirical Column Formulas--Centric Loading 717 16.6 Eccentrically Loaded Columns 725 17 Energy Methods 743 17.1 Introduction 743 17.2 Work and Strain Energy 744 17.3 Elastic Strain Energy for Axial Deformation 748 17.4 Elastic Strain Energy for Torsional Deformation 750 17.5 Elastic Strain Energy for Flexural Deformation 752 17.6 Impact Loading 756 17.7 Work-Energy Method for Single Loads 770 17.8 Method of Virtual Work 773 17.9 Deflections of Trusses by the Virtual-Work Method 778 17.10 Deflections of Beams by the Virtual-Work Method 786 17.11 Castigliano's Second Theorem 795 17.12 Calculating Deflections of Trusses by Castigliano's Theorem 797 17.13 Calculating Deflections of Beams by Castigliano's Theorem 803 Appendix A Geometric Properties of an Area 823 A.1 Centroid of an Area 823 A.2 Moment of Inertia for an Area 826 A.3 Product of Inertia for an Area 830 A.4 Principal Moments of Inertia 833 A.5 Mohr's Circle for Principal Moments of Inertia 837 Appendix B Geometric Properties of Structural Steel Shapes 841 Appendix C Table of Beam Slopes and Deflections 847 Appendix D Average Properties of Selected Materials 851 Appendix E Generalized Hooke's Law for Isotropic and Orthotropic Materials 855 E.1 Generalized Hooke's Law for Isotropic Materials 855 E.2 Generalized Hooke's Law for Orthotropic Materials 872 Appendix F Fundamental Mechanics of Materials Equations 877 Answers To Odd Numbered Problems (Available Online)

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xv 1 Introduction to Innovation Project Management 1 Introduction 1 Definitions for Innovation 2 The Business Need 4 Innovation Literature 6 Project Management Literature 7 Innovation Benchmarking 8 Value: The Missing Link 10 Innovation Targeting 12 Timeline for Innovation Targeting 13 Innovation in Small Companies 14 Seven Critical Dimensions for Scaling Project Management Innovation 14 Implications and Issues for Project Managers and Innovation Personnel 16 2 Types of Innovation 19 Introduction 19 Continuous Versus Discontinuous Innovation 20 Incremental Versus Radical Innovation 21 Understanding Innovation Differences 22 Incremental Innovation Versus New Product Development 23 Product Development Innovation Categories 23 Closed and Open Innovation 25 Crowdsourcing 27 Co-Creation Innovation 29 Open Innovation in Action: Airbus and Co-creation Partnerships 35 Value (Or Value-Driven) Innovation 37 Agile Innovation 38 Agile Innovation in Action: Deloitte 40 Government Innovation 47 Financial Innovation 50 Healthcare Innovation 51 Brand Innovation 53 Sustainable Innovation 53 Humanitarian/Social Innovation 54 Social Innovation in Action: Hitachi 55 educational Innovation 57 Manufacturing Innovation 58 A Case Study 60 Nontechnical Innovation in Action 60 Other Categories of Innovation 62 Role of the Board of Directors 66 Finding an Innovation Project Sponsor 66 Implications and Issues for Project Managers and Innovation Personnel 67 3 Innovation and Strategic Planning 69 Introduction 69 Role of the Innovation Project Manager in Strategic Planning 70 Role of the Portfolio PMO 70 Business Impact Analysis 71 Innovation Maturity Models 71 Types of Strategies 73 Role of Innovation in Strategic Planning 74 Role of Marketing in Strategic Innovation Planning 75 Product Portfolio Analysis 76 Identifying Core Competencies Using SWOT Analysis 82 Innovation Project Management Competency Models in Action: eli Lilly 84 Marketing’s Involvement with Innovation Project Managers 95 Product Life Cycles 97 Classification of R&D Projects 97 Research Versus Development 98 The Research and Development Ratio 99 Offensive Versus Defensive Innovation 100 Modeling the R&D Planning Function 101 Priority Setting 105 Contract R&D 107 Nondisclosure Agreements, Secrecy Agreements, and Confidentiality Agreements 108 Government Influence 108 Sources for Innovation Technology 109 Sources of Ideas 110 The Project Manager’s Role in Developing Innovation Skills and Ideas in People 112 establishing a Project Selection Criteria 114 Project Selection Issues 115 economic evaluation of Projects 116 Role of the Project Manager in Project Selection 119 Project Selection and Politics 124 Project Readjustments 126 Project Termination 127 Implications and Issues for Project Managers and Innovation Personnel 127 4 Innovation Tools and Processes 129 Introduction 129 New Product Development 130 The Fuzzy Front end 131 Prioritizing Product Features 133 Line of Sight 134 Misalignment Issues 135 Risk Management 137 The Innovation Culture 140 Innovation Functional Units 145 Innovative Cultures and Corporate Leadership 145 Idea Generation 146 Spinoff Innovations 147 Understanding Reward Systems 148 Innovation Leadership in Action: Medtronic 149 IPM Skills Needed 152 Design Thinking 155 Brainstorming 157 Whiteboarding 163 Mind Maps 163 Active Listening 165 Pitching the Innovation 167 Cognitive Biases 167 Prototypes 168 Creativity and Innovation Fears 170 Innovation Governance 170 Corporate Innovation Governance Risks 171 Transformational Governance 174 Balanced Scorecard 175 Strategy Maps 176 Innovation Portfolio Management 177 Innovation Sponsorship 179 The Innovation Team 180 Virtual Versus Co-Located Innovation Teams 181 Artificial Intelligence and IPM 182 The Need for PM 2.0 and PM 3.0 184 Implications and Issues for Project Managers and Innovation Personnel 187 5 From Traditional to Innovation Project Management Thinking 191 Introduction 191 Information Warehouses 193 Innovation Planning Overview 197 Innovation Methodologies 200 Methodology Gates 202 Innovation Assumptions 202 Validating the Objectives 204 Differing Views of the Project 206 Life-Cycle Phases 206 Life-Cycle Costing 210 Work Breakdown Structure 211 Budgeting 212 Scheduling 212 Scope Change Control 213 Technology Readiness Levels 214 Lean Project Management: Kanban 216 Communication 217 enabling Innovation Success in Solution Design and Delivery in Healthcare Business 218 Innovation in Action: Dubai Customs and the Accelerated exploratory Lab 229 Innovation in Action: Merck KGaA, Darmstadt, Germany 234 Innovation in Action: Repsol 237 Staffing Innovation Projects 241 Implications and Issues for Project Managers and Innovation Personnel 243 6 Innovation Management Software 245 Introduction 245 Origin and Benefits of Innovation Software 246 Software Innovation in Action: IdeaScale 248 Software Innovation in Action: Hype Innovation 251 Software and Open Innovation 260 Implications and Issues for Project Managers and Innovation Personnel 261 7 Value-based Innovation Project Management Metrics 263 Introduction 263 Value Over the Years 265 Value and Leadership 266 Combining Benefits and Value 268 Recognizing the Need for Value Metrics 269 The Need for effective Measurement Techniques 271 Measuring Intangible Assets 276 Customer / Stakeholder Impact on Value Metrics 278 Customer Value Management Programs 279 The Relationship between Project Management and Value 282 Creating an Innovation Project Management Baseline 284 Selecting the Right Metrics 286 The Failure of Traditional Metrics and KPIs 288 The Need for Value Metrics 288 Creating Value Metrics 289 Industry examples of Innovation Value Metrics 295 Alignment to Strategic Business Objectives 296 Metrics for Innovation Governance 298 Innovation Metrics in Action: InnovationLabs 299 The Dark Side of Innovation Metrics 309 establishing a Metrics Management Program 310 Implications and Issues for Project Managers and Innovation Personnel 312 8 Business Models 315 Introduction 315 From Project Manager to Designer 317 Business Models and Value 318 Business Model Characteristics 318 Strategic Partnerships 319 Business Intelligence 319 Skills for the Business Model Innovator 320 Business Model enhancements 322 Types of Business Models 324 Business Models and Strategic Alliances 326 Identifying Business Model Threats 327 Business Model Failure 328 Business Models and Lawsuits 328 Implications and Issues for Project Managers and Innovation Personnel 330 9 Disruptive Innovation 333 Introduction 333 early Understanding of Disruption 334 Innovation and the Business Model Disruption 335 Categories of Disruptive Innovations 337 The Dark Side of Disruptive Innovation 338 Using Integrated Product/Project Teams 339 Disruptive Innovation in Action 341 Implications and Issues for Project Managers and Innovation Personnel 342 10 Innovation Roadblocks 345 Introduction 345 The Failure of Success 346 One Size Fits All 346 Insufficient Line of Sight 346 Failing to Search for Ideas 347 Sense of Urgency 347 Working with Prima Donnas 347 Lack of Collaboration 348 Politics 348 Project Workloads 348 Intellectual Property Rights 348 Not Understanding the Relationship between Creativity and Innovation 349 Too Many Assumptions 350 Innovation Funding 350 Cash Flow and Financial Uncertainty 350 Control, Control, and Control 350 Analysis–Paralysis 351 Innovation in Action: Naviair 351 Innovation in Action: Overcoming the Roadblocks 363 11 Defining Innovation Success and Failure 367 Introduction 367 The Business Side of Traditional Project Success 368 Defining Project Success: The early Years 370 Redefining Project Success: Approaching the Twenty-First Century 371 Degrees of Success and Failure 372 Defining Success at the Beginning of the Project 374 The Role of Marketing in Defining Innovation Success 374 The Business Side of Innovation Success 377 Prioritization of the Success Factors 379 Innovation Project Success and Core Competencies 380 Innovation Project Success and Business Models 381 Causes of Innovation Project Failure 381 Identifying the Success and Failure Criteria 384 Post-Failure Success Analysis 385 Sensemaking 386 The Need for New Metrics 387 Learning from Failure 387 The Failure of Success 388 Conclusion 390 Implications and Issues for Project Managers and Innovation Personnel 390 12 Innovation in Action 393 Introduction 393 Innovation in Action: Apple 393 Innovation in Action: Facebook 395 Innovation in Action: IBM 396 Innovation in Action: Texas Instruments 399 Innovation in Action: 3M 401 Innovation in Action: Motorola 403 Innovation Project Management: The Case of KAUST Smart 404 Key Characteristic of KAUST Smart Projects (What makes KAUST Smart Projects Unique) 405 Recent and Ongoing Project examples 408 Innovation in Action: Samsung 410 Agile Innovation in Action: Integrated Computer Solutions, Inc 411 Innovation in Action: COMAU 418 Innovation in Action: Tokio Marine and Nichido Systems 425 Innovation in Action: GeA 427 Innovation Management at GeA – The Strategic Parts 432 Innovation in Action: Wärtsilä energy Solutions 435 Critical Issues 437 13 Case Studies 439 Disney (A): Innovation Project Management Skills at Disney 439 Disney (B): Creating Innovation: Disney’s Haunted Mansion 449 Disney (C): Impact Of Culture On Global Innovation Opportunities 464 Disney (D): The Partnership Side Of Global Business Model Innovation 482 Case Study: Boeing 787 Dreamliner: Managing Innovation Risks with a New Business Model 494 Case Study: The Sydney Australia Opera House 501 Case Study: Ampore Faucet Company: Managing Different Views on Innovation 508 Case Study: The Innovation Sponsors 510 Case Study: The Rise, Fall, and Resurrection of Iridium: When an Innovation Business Model Fails 512 Case Study: Zane Corporation: Selecting an Innovation Framework 540 Case Study: Redstone Inc.: Understanding Innovation Cultures 544 Case Study: The Government Think Tank: The Failure of Crowdsourcing 546 Case Study: Lego: Brand Management Innovation 548 Index 565

Read more less

Book SynopsisTHE PROJECT MANAGER'S GUIDE TO MASTERING AGILE Updated guide to Agile methodologies, with real-world case studies and valuable frameworks for project managers moving to Agile The Project Manager's Guide to Mastering Agile helps project managers who are faced with the challenge of adapting their project management approach to an Agile environment, showing how these approaches can work jointly to improve project outcomes in any project, with discussion topics and real-world case studies that facilitate hands-on learning. It also provides project managers with the fundamental knowledge to take a leadership role in working with companies to develop a well-integrated, enterprise-level Agile Project Management approach to fit their business. The original edition of this book has been very successful and is used as a graduate-level textbook in several universities. This new edition builds on the success of the original edition and includes updated contenTable of ContentsChapter 1: Introduction to Agile Project Management The Chasm in Project Management Philosophies The Impact on the Project Management Profession The Evolution of Agile and Waterfall The Evolution of the Project Management Profession Agile Project Management Benefits Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Part 1: Fundamentals of Agile Chapter 2: Agile History and the Agile Manifesto Agile Early History Agile Manifesto (2001) Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Chapter 3: Scrum Overview Scrum Roles Scrum Framework General Scrum/Agile Principles Scrum Values Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Chapter 4: Agile Planning, Requirements, and Product Backlog Agile Planning Practices Agile Requirements Practices User Personas and Stories Product Backlog Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Part 2: Agile Project Management Chapter 5: Agile Development, Quality, and Testing Practices Agile Software Development Practices Agile Quality Management Practices Agile Testing Practices Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Chapter 6: Time-Boxing, Kanban, and Theory of Constraints The Importance of Flow Time-Boxing Kanban Process Theory of Constraints Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Chapter 7: Agile Estimation Agile Estimation Overview Agile Estimation Practices Velocity and burn-down/burn-up charts Summary of key points Discussion topics Chapter 8: Agile Project Management Role Agile Project Management Shifts in Thinking Potential Agile Project Management Roles Agile, PMI®, and PMBOK® Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Chapter 9: Agile Communications and Tools Agile Communications Practices Agile Project Management Tools Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Chapter 10: Learning to See the Big Picture Systems Thinking Complex Adaptive Systems Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Chapter 11: The Roots of Agile Influence of Total Quality Management (TQM) Influence of Lean Manufacturing Principles of Product Development Flow Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Part 3: Agile Project Management Planning and Management Chapter 12: Hybrid Agile Models What is a Hybrid Agile Model and Why Would You Use It? What Are the Benefits of a Hybrid Agile Model? What Is Different About a Hybrid Agile Model? Choosing the Right Approach Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Chapter 13: Value-driven Delivery Value-driven Delivery Overview Principles of Value-driven Delivery Customer-value Prioritization Overview Value-driven Delivery Tools Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Chapter 14: Adaptive Planning What is Adaptive Planning? Rolling Wave Planning Progressive Elaboration and Multi-level Planning Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Chapter 15: Agile Planning Practices and Tools Product/Project Vision Product Roadmaps Exploratory 360 Assessment Agile Functional Decomposition Agile Project Charter Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Chapter 16: Agile Stakeholder Management and Agile Contracts Why Is Stakeholder Management Important? What Is a Stakeholder? Stakeholder Management Process What's Different About Agile Stakeholder Management? Agile Contracts Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Chapter 17: Distributed Project Management in Agile What Is Distributed Project Management? Distributed Project Management Roles Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Part 4: Making Agile Work for a Business Chapter 18: Scaling Agile to an Enterprise Level Enterprise-Level Agile Challenges Enterprise-Level Obstacles to Overcome Enterprise-Level Implementation Considerations Enterprise-Level Management Practices Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Chapter 19: Scaling Agile for Multiple Team Projects Scrum of Scrums Approach Large Scale Scrum (LeSS) Nexus Scrum at Scale Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Chapter 20: Adapting an Agile Approach to Fit a Business The Impact of Different Business Environments on Agile Typical Levels of Management Corporate Culture and Values Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Chapter 21: Enterprise-Level Agile Transformations Planning an Agile Transformation Adaptive Project Governance Model Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Part 5: Enterprise-Level Agile Frameworks Chapter 22: Scaled Agile Framework SAFe Competency Areas SAFe Core Values Lean Agile Mindset SAFe Lean Agile Principles SAFe Artifacts and Supporting Capabilities Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Chapter 23: Disciplined Agile Delivery DA Full Delivery Lifecycles DA Roles DA Mindset DA Tool Kit Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Chapter 24: Managed Agile Development Framework Managed Agile Development Overview Objectives of Managed Agile Development Framework Description Roles and Responsibilities Summary of Key Points Discussion Topics Chapter 25: Summary of Enterprise-Level Frameworks High-level Comparison How These Frameworks Have Evolved Part 6: Case Studies Chapter 26: “Not-So-Successful” Case Studies Company A Company B Company C Chapter 27: Case Study—Valpak Background Overview Challenges Key Success Factors Results and Conclusions Lessons Learned Chapter 28: Case Study—Harvard Pilgrim Health Care Background Overview Project management approach Challenges Key Success Factors Conclusions Lessons Learned Chapter 29: Case Study—General Dynamics UK Limited. Background Overview Project Management Approach Challenges Key Success Factors Conclusions Lessons Learned Chapter 30: Agile Hardware Development Agile Hardware Development Overview How It’s Done at Tesla Overall Summary Chapter 31: Non-Software Case Studies Agile Home Remodeling Agile Book Publishing Chapter 32: Overall Summary Evolution of the Project Management Profession What To Do Differently General Recommendations Appendices Appendix A: Additional Reading Appendix B: Glossary of Terms Appendix C: Example Project/Program Charter Template Appendix D: Suggested Course Outline Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis new 2011 edition of this databook has been heavily updated and replaces the previous editions of this bestselling pocket guide, providing a concise and useful source of up-to-date essential for the student or practicing engineer.Table of ContentsForeword xi Preface xiii Introduction – The Role of Technical Standards xv Section 1: Engineering Careers 1 1.1 Introduction: what is an engineer? 1 1.2 A rough guide to industry breakdown 3 1.3 Training and professional development 4 1.4 Degrees of (engineering) excellence 5 1.5 Degrees and how to pass them 9 1.6 Do you have any . . . experience? 12 1.7 Final cut – job interviews 14 Section 2: Units 18 2.1 The Greek alphabet 18 2.2 Units systems 19 2.3 Units and conversions 21 2.4 Consistency of units 32 2.5 Dimensional analysis 36 2.6 Essential engineering mathematics 38 2.7 Maths and the real world? 40 Section 3: Engineering Design – Process and Principles 49 3.1 Engineering problem-solving 49 3.2 Problem types and methodologies 49 3.3 Design principles 51 3.4 The engineering design process 52 3.5 Design as a systematic activity (the 'pugh' method) 53 3.6 The innovation model 53 3.7 Creativity tools 57 3.8 The product design specification (PDS) 58 3.9 Presenting technical information 60 3.10 The anatomy of mechanical design 79 3.11 Safety in design – principles and practice 89 3.12 Design by nature – project toucan 105 Section 4: Basic Mechanical Design 110 4.1 Engineering abbreviations 110 4.2 Datums and tolerances – principles 112 4.3 Toleranced dimensions 113 4.4 General tolerances 114 4.5 Holes 115 4.6 Screw threads 116 4.7 Limits and fits 117 4.8 Surface finish 119 Section 5: Motion 122 5.1 Making sense of equilibrium 122 5.2 Motion equations 123 5.3 Newton's laws of motion 124 5.4 Simple harmonic motion (SHM) 125 5.5 Understanding acceleration 126 5.6 Dynamic balancing 126 5.7 Vibration 128 5.8 Machine vibration 129 5.9 Machinery noise 130 Section 6: Deformable Body Mechanics 133 6.1 Quick reference – mechanical notation 133 6.2 Engineering structures – so where are all the pin joints? 135 6.3 Simple stress and strain 136 6.4 Simple elastic bending 138 6.5 Slope and deflection of beams 140 6.6 Torsion 142 6.7 Thin cylinders 145 6.8 Cylindrical vessels with hemispherical ends 146 6.9 Thick cylinders 147 6.10 Buckling of struts 148 6.11 Flat circular plates 149 6.12 Stress concentration factors 151 Section 7: Material Failure 155 7.1 How materials fail 155 7.2 LEFM method 156 7.3 Multi-axis stress states 157 7.4 Fatigue 158 7.5 Factors of safety 161 7.6 United states practice 161 7.7 Ultimate jigsaw – what everything is made of 162 Section 8: Thermodynamics and Cycles 166 8.1 Quick reference: symbols – thermodynamics 166 8.2 Basic thermodynamic laws 167 8.3 Entropy 169 8.4 Enthalpy 169 8.5 Other definitions 170 8.6 Cycles 170 8.7 The steam cycle 172 8.8 Properties of steam 172 8.9 Reference information 175 8.10 The gas turbine (GT) cycle 175 Section 9: Basic Fluid Mechanics and Aerodynamics 178 9.1 Basic properties 178 9.2 Flow equations 180 9.3 Flow regimes 186 9.4 Boundary layers 189 9.5 Isentropic flow 191 9.6 Compressible one-dimensional flow 191 9.7 Normal shock waves 192 9.8 Axisymmetric flows 195 9.9 Drag coefficients 195 9.10 General airfoil theory 197 9.11 Airfoil coefficients 198 9.12 Pressure distributions 200 9.13 Aerodynamic centre 200 9.14 Centre of pressure 201 9.15 Supersonic conditions 202 9.16 Wing loading: semi-ellipse assumption 204 Section 10: Fluid Equipment 206 10.1 Turbines 206 10.2 Refrigeration systems 207 10.3 Diesel engines 209 10.4 Heat exchangers 210 10.5 Centrifugal pumps 212 10.6 Impeller types 214 Section 11: Pressure Vessels 216 11.1 Vessel codes and standards 216 11.2 Pressure vessel design features 219 11.3 Cylindrical pressure vessel design stresses 220 11.4 Stress categories 221 11.5 Analysis of stress combinations 222 11.6 Vessel certification 223 11.7 Flanges 223 Section 12: Materials 225 12.1 Observing crystals: order and disorder 225 12.2 Carbon steels 226 12.3 Low-alloy steels 227 12.4 Alloy steels 227 12.5 Cast iron (CI) 228 12.6 Stainless steels 230 12.7 Non-ferrous alloys 233 12.8 Nickel alloys 233 12.9 Zinc alloys 234 12.10 Copper alloys 234 12.11 Aluminium alloys 235 12.12 Titanium alloys 236 12.13 Engineering plastics 237 12.14 Material traceability and documentation 238 12.15 Corrosion 239 Section 13: Machine Elements 244 13.1 Screw fasteners 244 13.2 Bearings 247 13.3 Ball and roller bearings 248 13.4 Bearing lifetime 249 13.5 Coefficient of friction 250 13.6 Gear trains 251 13.7 Seals 254 13.8 Shaft couplings 257 13.9 Cam mechanisms 259 13.10 Clutches 261 13.11 Pulley mechanisms 264 13.12 Drive types 266 Section 14: Quality Assurance and Quality Control 267 14.1 Quality assurance: ISO 9001: 2008 267 14.2 Quality system certification 268 14.3 The ISO 9001 standard 269 14.4 Taguchi methods 271 14.5 Statistical process control (SPC) 272 14.6 Normal distribution 272 14.7 The binomial and poisson distributions 274 14.8 Reliability 274 14.9 Improving design reliability: main principles 277 14.10 'Design for reliability' – a new approach 278 Section 15: Project Engineering 281 15.1 Project planning 281 15.2 Critical path analysis (CPA) 282 15.3 Planning with Gantt charts 283 15.4 Rapid prototyping 284 15.5 Value analysis 285 Section 16: Welding 286 16.1 Welding processes 286 16.2 Weld types and orientation 289 16.3 Welding symbols 292 16.4 Welding defects 295 16.5 Welding documentation 297 Section 17: Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) 299 17.1 Non-destructive testing acronyms 299 17.2 Visual examination 301 17.3 Dye penetrant (DP) testing 301 17.4 Magnetic particle (MP) testing 302 17.5 Ultrasonic testing (UT) 303 17.6 Radiographic testing (RT) 313 Section 18: Surface Protection 318 18.1 Painting 318 18.2 Galvanizing 320 18.3 Chrome plating 320 18.4 Rubber linings 321 Section 19: Metallurgical Terms 324

Read more less

Book SynopsisTough Test Questions? Missed Lectures? Not Enough Time?Fortunately, thereâs Schaumâs. More than 40 million students have trusted Schaumâs to help them succeed in the classroom and on exams. Schaumâs is the key to faster learning and higher grades in every subject. Each Outline presents all the essential course information in an easy-to-follow, topic-by-topic format. You also get hundreds of examples, solved problems, and practice exercises to test your skills. This Schaumâs Outline gives you: 628 fully solved problems to reinforce knowledge 1 final practice exam Hundreds of examples with explanations of statics concepts Extra practice on topics such as orthogonal triad of unit vectors, resultant of distributed force system, noncoplanar force systems, slope of the Shear diagram, and slope of the Moment diagram Support for all the major textbooks for statics courses Access to revise

Read more less

Book SynopsisA complete revision of the industry-standard book on materials requirements standards for manufacturingThis thoroughly revised guide offers the current and next generation of supply chain professionals a clear explanation of the fundamentals of planning and MRP systems in todayâs volatile and complex supply chains. Long considered the industry standard, Orlicky's Material Requirements Planning is an indispensable tool for manufacturing practitioners and candidates preparing for certification exams including CPIM, CSCP, DDPP and MRPFP. Streamlined and reorganized, this fourth edition brings clarity and focus to the prerequisites, choices, inputs, outputs, latest techniques and challenges associated with modern MRP systems across a variety of industries including project, custom, batch, repetitive and continuous process manufacturers. Included is the latest evolution of MRP logic including the increasingly popular DDMRP derivative and its componen

Read more less

Book SynopsisCut through the noise and ace your statics course with help from YouTube guru Jeff HansonStruggling with statics? Not getting the help you need from your professor or textbook? Donât worryâwe got you! This is exactly what you need to get through this difficult course. How to Ace Statics with Jeff Hanson gets right to the pointâit boils down what you need to know, lays out pro tips from the experts, and points out common pitfalls to avoid.Youâll learn the core concepts by watching Jeff Hansonâs videos on YouTube that are proven to help students like you ace the class. And then you'll reinforce that knowledge by following Jeffâs bookâs to-the-point explanations examples, and practice problems. The book contains a QR code to the YouTube videos playlist plus extra questions, problems, and challenges that expand on the videos. This student workbookâor âœun-bookââwill untangle this thorny course and have you breezing through statics.Expands on Jef

Read more less

Book SynopsisR.C. Hibbeler graduated from the University of Illinois-Urbana with a B.S. in Civil Engineering (major in Structures) and an M.S. in Nuclear Engineering. He obtained his PhD in Theoretical and Applied Mechanics from Northwestern University. Professor Hibbeler's professional experience includes postdoctoral work in reactor safety and analysis at Argonne National Laboratory, and structural and stress analysis work at Chicago Bridge and Iron, as well as at Sargent and Lundy in Chicago. He has practiced engineering in Ohio, New York, and Louisiana.Table of Contents General Principles Force Vectors Force System Resultants Equilibrium of a Rigid Body Structural Analysis Center of Gravity, Centroid, and Moment of Inertia Stress and Strain Mechanical Properties of Materials Axial Load Torsion Bending Transverse Shear Combined Loadings Stress and Strain Transformation Design of Beams and Shafts Deflection of Beams and Shafts Buckling of Columns Appendices Mathematical Review and Expressions Geometric Properties of an Area and Volume Geometric Properties of Wide-Flange Sections Slopes and Deflections of Beams

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisQuantum Untangling Non-technical and accessible primer providing key foundational knowledge on quantum mechanics and quantum field theory Quantum Untangling introduces the readers to the fascinating and strange realm of quantum mechanics and quantum field theory, written in an accessible manner while not shying away from using mathematics where necessary. The book goes into sufficient depth and conveys basic and more intricate concepts such as wave-particle duality, wave functions, the superposition principle, quantum tunneling, the quantum harmonic oscillator, the Dirac equation, and Feynman diagrams. It also covers the physics of the Higgs boson and provides a glimpse into string theory and loop quantum gravity. Overall, the author introduces complex concepts of quantum mechanics in an accessible and fun-to-read manner while laying the groundwork for mastering an advanced level of treatment in standard quantum mechanics textbooks and university courses.Table of ContentsIntroduction xii Acknowledgements xiii Module I Special Relativity 1 1 Special Relativity 3 1.1 Special Relativity: Simple, Yet Baffling 3 1.2 The Speed of Light Is Constant: So What? 4 1.3 The Invariant Interval Equation 5 1.4 Time Distortion Quantified 6 1.5 Length Distortion 8 1.6 Leading Clocks Lag 9 1.7 Lorentz Transformations and Invariance 10 1.8 Summary: Are You Joking Mr Einstein? 11 2 Paradoxes of Special Relativity 13 2.1 Journey to a Distant Planet (1) 13 2.2 Journey to a Distant Planet (2) 14 2.3 The Twin Paradox 16 2.4 Experimental Proof 18 3 Einstein’s Famous Equation 20 3.1 Mass, Energy, Momentum – and Particle Time 20 3.2 How Did Albert Figure It Out? 21 3.2.1 The Ingredients 21 3.2.2 The Calculation 21 3.2.3 The Intuition 22 3.3 Three Beautiful Equations 23 3.4 How Wrong Were We? 24 3.5 One Further Equation 25 3.6 Summary 26 Module II Essential Quantum Mechanics 27 4 Wave-particle Duality 29 4.1 Classical Physics Cannot Explain… 29 4.2 Quanta of Light and the Photoelectric Effect 30 4.3 De Broglie’s Crazy Idea 31 4.4 The Double-slit Experiment 32 4.5 Schrödinger’s Mistreated Cat 34 4.6 Summary 35 5 Superpositions and Uncertainty 37 5.1 The Free Particle Wave Function 37 5.1.1 The Phase of the Wave 38 5.1.2 Derivatives of the Free Particle Wave Function 38 5.1.3 Linking Back to Special Relativity 39 5.1.4 Consider a Rocket 40 5.2 From Sinusoid to Uncertainty 41 5.3 Superposition 42 5.3.1 Superposition Saves the Day 42 5.3.2 Combining Eigenstates 43 5.4 Heisenberg’s Uncertainty Principle 44 5.5 In Praise of Fuzziness 45 5.6 God Plays Dice: The Role of Probability 46 5.7 Summary 47 5.8 What Is This Wave Function? 47 5.9 The Role of Rest Mass 48 6 Everything Happens … Kind of 49 6.1 The Feynman Path Integral 49 6.2 Change in Phase of the Wave Function 50 6.3 Simplified Path Integral Model 51 6.4 The Principle of Stationary Action 53 6.5 Action and the Lagrangian 54 6.6 From the Lagrangian to the Equations of Motion 55 6.7 The Uncertainty Relationship: A Different Perspective 56 6.8 Feynman Diagrams 57 6.9 Summary 58 7 Measurement and Interaction 60 7.1 What Can You Know about a Quantum System? 60 7.2 Collapse of the Wave Function 61 7.3 When a Body Meets a Body … 63 7.4 An Electron in a Box 63 7.5 Collapse of the Wave Function – a Twist 65 7.6 Decoherence and the Measurement Problem 66 7.7 When a Body Leaves a Body – Entanglement at a Distance 67 7.8 Summary 68 8 Module Summary and Schrödinger 70 8.1 Module Summary 70 8.2 Adding up the Implications 73 8.3 The Path to Schrödinger’s Equation 73 8.3.1 The Klein-Gordon Equation 74 8.3.2 A Taste of Schrödinger’s Equation 75 8.3.3 Incorporating Potential Energy 76 8.4 Module Memory Jogger 78 Module III Complex Quantum Mechanics 79 9 Introducing Complex Numbers 81 9.1 Welcome to Complex Numbers 81 9.1.1 We Have a Problem 82 9.1.2 Complex Notation for Phase 82 9.1.3 Interference Calculations 83 9.1.4 A Friend with Benefits 84 9.1.5 Not a Free Lunch 84 9.2 Representing the Wave Function with Complex Notation 85 9.3 Summary 85 10 Superpositions and Fourier Transforms 86 10.1 The Maths of Fourier Transforms 87 10.1.1 Example 1: Fourier Transform of a Position Eigenstate 88 10.1.2 Example 2: Fourier Transform of ∂Ψ 88 10.2 Heisenberg’s Uncertainty Principle and the Gaussian Distribution 89 10.3 The Quantum Footprint 90 10.4 Time and Energy 92 10.5 Summary 93 11 Schrödinger’s Equation 95 11.1 Understanding Schrödinger’s Equation 95 11.1.1 Incorporating Potential Energy 96 11.1.2 Superpositions 96 11.1.3 Schrödinger’s Equation in Words 96 11.2 Operators, Eigenstates and Eigenvalues 97 11.3 Commutation Relations 100 11.4 Expectation Values and Dirac Notation 101 11.5 Energy Eigenstates are Stationary 102 11.6 Time-independent Schrödinger Equation 102 12 Schrödinger’s Equation in Action 104 12.1 Free Particle Wave Function (E > V) 104 12.2 Creeping into Forbidden Places (E < V) 105 12.3 The Finite Potential Well 106 12.4 Quantum Tunnelling and the Sun 106 12.5 Dodging Potential Obstacles (E > V) 108 12.6 Quantum Biology 110 12.7 Wave Packets: A Model for Localised Particles 110 12.8 Summary 113 13 Quantum Harmonic Oscillator 114 13.1 Introduction 114 13.1.1 The Simple Harmonic Oscillator 114 13.1.2 The SHO and QHO: Why Do We Care? 115 13.2 Penetration Model for the QHO 116 13.3 Schrödinger’s Equation for the QHO 117 13.3.1 Ground State of the QHO 118 13.3.2 A Trick to Find the Other Energy Eigenstates of the QHO 119 13.3.3 The QHO Energy Eigenstate Ladder 120 13.3.4 QHO Superpositions 121 13.4 The QHO in Three Dimensions 122 13.5 Formal Definition of the Creation and Annihilation Operators 123 13.6 The Path to Quantum Field Theory (QFT) 125 14 Angular Momentum 126 14.1 A Primer on Classical Angular Momentum 126 14.2 Quanta of Angular Momentum 128 14.3 Angular Momentum’s Intricate Dance 128 14.4 Angular Kinetic Energy and Angular Momentum 129 14.5 The Pattern of Angular Momentum Eigenstates 130 14.5.1 Ground State: l = 0 131 14.5.2 First Energy Level: l = 1 131 14.5.3 Three Distinct First Level States: l = 1, m = −1, 0, + 1 131 14.5.4 Resulting in the Pattern 132 14.6 The Angular Momentum Creation Operator 133 14.7 Summary 134 15 Coulomb Potential 136 15.1 The Hydrogen Emission Spectrum 136 15.2 The Challenge of the Coulomb Potential 137 15.3 A Primitive Model 138 15.4 Schrödinger’s Equation for Hydrogen 139 15.4.1 Spherical Harmonics – merci Monsieur Laplace 139 15.4.2 The Angular Equation 141 15.4.3 The Shape of the Atomic Orbitals 142 15.4.4 Radial Kinetic Energy 143 15.4.5 The Radial Equation 144 15.5 Discussion 146 16 The Periodic Table 149 16.1 Introduction 149 16.2 Adding More Protons 150 16.3 The Periodic Table 150 16.4 Molecular Bonds 152 16.4.1 Ionic Bonds 152 16.4.2 Covalent Bonds 153 16.5 Bonds in the Nucleus 154 16.6 Virtual Particles 154 16.7 Fusion and Fission 155 16.8 Module Summary 156 16.9 Module Memory Jogger 157 Module IV Relativistic Quantum Mechanics 159 17 Spin 161 17.1 Intrinsic Angular Momentum: Spin 161 17.2 Spin-half Particles and the Pauli Exclusion Principle 162 17.2.1 The Stern-Gerlach Experiment 162 17.2.2 Spin-half and Spinors 163 17.2.3 The Pauli Exclusion Principle 164 17.2.4 The Pauli Matrices 165 17.3 Integer-spin: The Photon 168 17.3.1 Photon Polarisation 169 17.4 Bell’s Inequality and the Aspect Experiment 170 17.5 Summary 172 18 The Dirac Equation 173 18.1 Yet Another Equation? 173 18.2 Bi-spinors and Four-component Wave Functions 174 18.3 The Dirac Equation 175 18.3.1 The Ingredients 175 18.3.2 Dirac’s Crazy Insight 176 18.3.3 Dirac’s Matrices 177 18.3.4 We Are Finally There: Dirac’s Equation 179 18.4 Spin-half Is Built in 180 18.5 Interpreting the Dirac Equation 182 18.5.1 Zero Momentum: Distinct Spin and Antiparticles 182 18.5.2 The Dirac Equation and Minkowski Spacetime 182 18.5.3 Particle and Antiparticle States 183 18.5.4 Moving Frame 184 18.6 The Dirac Equation and Hydrogen 185 18.7 Dirac Equation: Modern Formulation 186 18.8 The Aftermath: Physics Falls Apart Again 186 19 Quantum Field Theory 189 19.1 Changing the Question 190 19.2 Quantum Fields Win the Day 190 19.2.1 The Quantum Field Structure 191 19.2.2 Quantum Fields and Spin 192 19.2.3 Creation and Annihilation 192 19.2.4 Bosons Like to Party 193 19.2.5 Conservation of Energy and Momentum 194 19.3 Non-relativistic Path Integrals and Action 195 19.4 QFT Path Integrals: A Relativistic Twist 197 19.5 Energy and Time 197 19.6 QFT Field Development Pathways 198 19.7 The Klein-Gordon Lagrangian as a Model 199 19.8 Global Gauge Invariance to Phase 200 19.9 Summary 201 20 Local Gauge Invariance 202 20.1 Introduction to Local Gauge Invariance 202 20.2 The Infinity Swimming Pool – an Analogy 204 20.3 Refresher in Electromagnetics (EM) 205 20.3.1 EM Refresher (1): The Basics 205 20.3.2 EM Refresher (2): The Vector Potential 206 20.4 The EM Quantum Field and Lagrangian 208 20.5 EM Gauge Invariance 210 20.6 U(1) Local Gauge Invariance: Putting Together the Pieces 210 20.6.1 The Swimming Pool: The Electron Field 210 20.6.2 The Balancing Tank: The EM Field 211 20.6.3 The Connection 211 20.6.4 The Interaction 211 20.6.5 The Infinity Pool: Combined Electron and EM Fields 211 20.7 The Dirac Lagrangian 212 20.8 Interaction and the Pathway of Stationary Action 213 20.9 The Photon Must Be Massless 214 20.10 Summary 214 21 QED and Feynman Diagrams 216 21.1 Feynman Diagrams 216 21.2 Example: Electron-positron Annihilation 218 21.3 Off-shell Drift and the QED Interaction 219 21.4 Feynman Rules 221 21.4.1 The Vertex and the Coupling Constant 221 21.4.2 The Propagator 222 21.4.3 Illustrative QED Calculation (Simplified) 223 21.4.4 From Amplitude to Cross Section 224 21.5 Resonance and the Search for New Particles 225 21.6 Do Virtual Particles Exist? 225 22 Renormalisation and EFT 227 22.1 Troublesome Loops 227 22.2 The Dressed Electron 228 22.3 Using Feynman Diagrams 229 22.4 Renormalisation 230 22.5 Ken Wilson’s Effective Field Theory (EFT) 232 22.6 Summary 232 23 The Strong Force 234 23.1 The Elementary Particles 234 23.2 The Strong Force: An Overview 235 23.2.1 Colour Charge 236 23.2.2 QCD, Gluons and Confinement 236 23.2.3 Strong Force Coupling Constant 237 23.3 QCD Local Gauge Invariance 238 23.3.1 SU(3) Symmetry and Colour 238 23.3.2 A Short Detour into Group Theory 240 23.3.3 The QCD Lagrangian 241 23.3.4 Gluons and the Generators 242 23.3.5 Summary: QCD As an Infinity Swimming Pool 243 23.4 The Residual Strong Force 244 23.5 Oh No! Here Comes Jill Again! 245 24 The Weak Force and Higgs Field (1) 246 24.1 Idealised Weak Force and SU(2) Symmetry 246 24.2 The Real Weak Force 248 24.2.1 Weak Isospin 248 24.2.2 Weak Interactions 249 24.2.3 Massive Weak Bosons 250 24.2.4 Wu and the Weak Left-handed Bias 250 24.3 What About SU(2) Gauge Symmetry? 251 24.4 Mass, Chirality and the Higgs Field 252 24.4.1 Mass as an Interaction 252 24.4.2 Chirality Versus Helicity 253 24.4.3 Chiral Dirac Equation 254 24.5 The Story So Far 255 25 The Weak Force and Higgs Field (2) 257 25.1 The Higgs Interaction 257 25.2 The Higgs Field and Mechanism 258 25.3 The Maths of the Higgs Field 259 25.4 Visualising the Higgs Field 259 25.5 Spontaneous Symmetry Breaking 260 25.6 The Maths of the Higgs Mechanism 260 25.6.1 The Starting Point 261 25.6.2 The Potential of the Higgs Field 261 25.6.3 Rotational Fluctuations of the Higgs Field 262 25.6.4 Putting It All Together 262 25.7 The Discovery of the Higgs Boson 264 25.8 Electroweak Unification 264 25.8.1 The Z Boson 265 25.8.2 The Photon 266 25.9 Summary 266 26 The Standard Model and Beyond 269 26.1 The Standard Model Lagrangian 269 26.2 From Einstein and de Broglie to Higgs 271 26.3 Questions and Problems 271 26.4 General Relativity and Quantum Mechanics 272 26.5 Supersymmetry (SUSY) 273 26.6 String Theory 274 26.6.1 Gravity in String Theory 274 26.6.2 Difficulties with String Theory 275 26.7 Loop Quantum Gravity (LQG) 276 26.7.1 LQG Space as a Quantum Entity 277 26.7.2 LQG Background Independence: Spin Networks 278 26.7.3 Difficulties with LQG 279 26.8 That’s All Folks! 280 26.9 Module Memory Jogger 280 Index 282

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn engineering-focused approach to project management techniques and strategies Engineering projects are vital for modern society and global human survival, but many engineering projects fail, in large part due to poor and/or ineffective management. These failures have led to a desire to identify those techniques and mindsets that can lead consistently to successful engineering projects. The first edition of this book, Engineering Project Management, has served as the essential overview to engineering-based project management methods, tools, processes, and mind-sets. Offering a practical, step-by-step guide to applying project management techniques in engineering settings, it draws upon active learning approaches and the author's extensive experience to create a thorough and cutting-edge guide. This second edition is now updated to reflect transformative recent developments in both technology and project management, and remains an indispensable tool for project m

Read more less

a huge range and FREE tracked UK delivery on ALL orders.

Read more less

a huge range and FREE tracked UK delivery on ALL orders.

Read more less

Book SynopsisA groundbreaking guide to the commercialization of scientific breakthroughs in chemistry, from successful entrepreneurs Chemistry Entrepreneurship is a step-by-step guide that is specifically devoted to understanding what it takes to start and grow a new company in the chemistry sector. Comprehensive in scope, the book covers the various aspects of the creation of a new chemical enterprise including: the protection of the invention, the business plan, the transfer from the research center or university, the financing, the legal setup, the launching of the company and its growth and exit strategies. This hands-on book contains the information needed to help to determine if you have what it takes to be a chemistry entrepreneur, explains how to take an ideas out of the lab and into the real world, reveals how to develop your burgeoning business, and shows how to sustain and grow your business. This much-needed resource also includes interviews with founding scientists who created their own successful chemical companies. This important book: Provides the practical information on how to start a company based on a scientific breakthrough Offers information on the mindset it takes to become, and remain, successful in the marketplace Presents case studies from world-renowned and highly experienced professionals who have successfully started a company Written for chemists in industry, chemists, materials scientists, chemical engineers, Chemistry Entrepreneurshipis a guide for becoming a founder of a successful chemical company.Table of ContentsForeword xv Preface xvii 1 We Need An Entrepreneurial Culture in Chemistry: Do You Have What It Takes to be a Chemistry Entrepreneur? 1 Frank L. Jaksch 1.1 Introduction: Disruptive Innovation in Chemistry is in High Demand 1 1.2 Examples of Innovation in Chemistry Catching the Eye of the Mainstream Market 2 1.2.1 Food and Nutrition 2 1.2.1.1 Just (formerly Hampton Creek) 2 1.2.1.2 Impossible Foods 2 1.2.1.3 Perfect Day 2 1.2.1.4 Endless West (formerly Ava Winery) 3 1.2.2 Sustainable/Renewable Chemistry 3 1.2.2.1 Ginkgo Bioworks 3 1.2.2.2 Modern Meadow 3 1.2.2.3 Genomatica 3 1.2.2.4 Zymergen 3 1.2.3 Biotech/Pharma 3 1.2.3.1 Moderna Therapeutics 4 1.2.3.2 Unity Biotechnology 4 1.2.3.3 CRISPR Therapeutics, Intellia Therapeutics, and Editas Medicine 4 1.2.4 Diagnostics 4 1.2.4.1 23andme 5 1.2.4.2 Grail Diagnostics 5 1.2.4.3 Viome 5 1.2.5 Cautionary Tales 5 1.2.5.1 Theranos 5 1.2.5.2 Solazyme (TerraVia) 6 1.3 Unique Challenges for Chemistry Entrepreneurs 6 1.3.1 The Most Important Trait of Every Chemical Entrepreneur 7 1.3.2 Chemistry Accelerators, Incubators, and Academic Spin-offs 9 1.3.3 Do Something, do Anything, even if it is Wrong 10 1.3.3.1 Penicillin 10 1.3.3.2 Post-It 11 1.3.3.3 Saccharin 11 1.3.3.4 Teflon 11 1.3.3.5 Viagra 12 1.3.4 You have your Discovery; now you need a Patent 13 1.3.4.1 Provisional Patent 13 1.3.4.2 Patent Application 13 1.3.4.3 Patent Prosecution 13 1.3.4.4 Structure of the Patent Claims 13 1.3.4.5 Patent Search and Prior Art 13 1.3.4.6 Publishing Before Patenting 14 1.3.4.7 PCT International Patent 14 1.3.4.8 Protectable Patent Value 14 1.3.4.9 Selecting the Wrong Lawyer for the Job 14 1.4 Invention is Only the Beginning of Creating a Company 15 1.4.1 Know your Role: Founding CEO vs. Founder vs. Inventor 16 1.4.2 Raising Money: Acquiring the Right Money at the Right Time 17 1.4.2.1 Self-funding 18 1.4.2.2 Friends and Family 18 1.4.2.3 Angel Investors 18 1.4.2.4 Accelerators and Incubators 18 1.4.2.5 Debt 18 1.4.2.6 Strategic Investment 19 1.4.2.7 Private Equity 19 1.4.2.8 Venture Capital 19 1.4.2.9 Investment Banks 20 1.4.3 Can you get the idea for Commercialization? 21 1.4.4 When you are Ready to Commercialize, which path do you take? 22 1.4.4.1 Licensing Deal 22 1.4.4.2 Business-to-Business (B2B) 23 1.4.4.3 Business-to-Consumer (B2C) 23 1.5 Do you have the Traits of an Entrepreneur? 24 1.6 Summary: Do You Have What It Takes? 28 Recommended Readings and References 30 Author Biography 30 2 Taking Ideas Out of the Lab: Why and When to Start a Company in the Biomedical Field 33 Miguel Jimenez, Jason Fuller, Paulina Hill, and Robert Langer 2.1 Introduction 33 2.2 Company Case Studies: Interviews with the Founding Scientists 34 2.2.1 Advanced Inhalation Research: Interview with David Edwards 34 2.2.1.1 Core Technology 34 2.2.1.2 What was the Key Problem and Initial Idea that Sparked the Work? 34 2.2.1.3 Why was it Important to Start Advanced Inhalation Research? 35 2.2.1.4 When was the Technology Ready to Start Advanced Inhalation Research? 35 2.2.1.5 What Lessons Did You Learn Through This Process? 35 2.2.1.6 Current Status 35 2.2.2 Kala Pharmaceuticals: Interview with Justin Hanes 36 2.2.2.1 Core Technology 36 2.2.2.2 What was the Key Problem and Initial Idea that Sparked the Work? 36 2.2.2.3 Why was it Important to Start Kala Pharmaceuticals? 36 2.2.2.4 When was the Technology Ready to Start Kala Pharmaceuticals? 36 2.2.2.5 What Lessons Did You Learn Through This Process? 37 2.2.2.6 Current Status 37 2.2.3 Moderna: Interview with Derrick Rossi 37 2.2.3.1 Core Technology 37 2.2.3.2 What was the Key Problem and Initial Idea that Sparked the Work? 37 2.2.3.3 Why was it Important to Start Moderna? 38 2.2.3.4 When was the Technology Ready to Start Moderna? 38 2.2.3.5 What Lessons Did You Learn Through This Process? 38 2.2.3.6 Current Status 38 2.2.4 Sigilon Therapeutics: Interview with Arturo Vegas 38 2.2.4.1 Core Technology 39 2.2.4.2 What was the Key Problem and Initial Idea that Sparked the Work? 39 2.2.4.3 Why was it Important to Start Sigilon? 39 2.2.4.4 When was the Technology Ready to Start Sigilon? 39 2.2.4.5 What Lessons Did You Learn Through This Process? 40 2.2.4.6 Current Status 40 2.2.5 Suono Bio: Interview with Carl Schoellhammer 40 2.2.5.1 Core Technology 40 2.2.5.2 What was the Key Problem and Initial Idea that Sparked the Work? 40 2.2.5.3 Why was it Important to Start Suono Bio? 40 2.2.5.4 When was the Technology Ready to Start Suono Bio? 41 2.2.5.5 What Lessons Did You Learn Through This Process? 41 2.2.5.6 Current Status 41 2.2.6 Vivtex: Interview with Thomas von Erlach 41 2.2.6.1 Core Technology 41 2.2.6.2 What was the Key Problem and Initial Idea that Sparked the Work? 41 2.2.6.3 Why was it Important to Start Vivtex? 42 2.2.6.4 When was the Technology Ready to Vivtex? 42 2.2.6.5 What Lessons Did You Learn Through This Process? 42 2.2.6.6 Current Status 42 2.3 Why Start a Company? 43 2.3.1 To Have the Largest Impact on Patients 43 2.3.2 To Introduce a New Platform Technology 44 2.3.3 Is Licensing an Alternative? 45 2.3.3.1 Licensing to Existing Companies 46 2.3.3.2 Corporate-sponsored Academic Research 46 2.4 When to Start a Company? 47 2.4.1 Is There Enough In Vivo Validation? 47 2.4.2 Was a Patent Filed? 48 2.4.3 Was a Paper Published? 49 2.5 The Secret Ingredient: Who and What? 51 2.5.1 Who Will Start the Company? 51 2.5.1.1 Seasoned Mentors as Co-founders 52 2.5.1.2 Finding a Great CEO 52 2.5.2 What Will the Company Actually Sell? 53 2.6 Summary: Lessons Learned 54 2.6.1 Lesson 1: Work on a High-impact, Platform Technology 54 2.6.2 Lesson 2: Patent Early and Broadly 54 2.6.3 Lesson 3: Keep the Tech in the Lab as Long as Possible 55 2.6.4 Lesson 4: Must have in vivo Efficacy and Safety 55 2.6.5 Lesson 5: Publish in Top Scientific Journals 55 2.6.6 Lesson 6: Partner with Seasoned Entrepreneurs 55 Further Reading 57 Author Biographies 58 3 In Pursuit of New Product Opportunities: Transferring Technology from Lab to Market 61 Alex Duchak 3.1 Introduction 61 3.1.1 Entrepreneurship and Technology Transfer 61 3.1.2 Pursuing Commercial Product/Service Opportunities via Technology Transfer 63 3.1.3 A Model for Entrepreneurship via Technology Transfer 65 3.1.4 Extracting Technologies from Research Institutions 68 3.2 Technology Discovery and Development 69 3.2.1 Origins of Technology 69 3.2.2 Technology Transfer Communication Models 70 3.2.3 Transitioning Technologies into Products 70 3.2.4 Timing Technology with Industry Acceptance 73 3.3 Customer Discovery and Development 76 3.3.1 Origins of Market Demand and Unmet Needs 76 3.3.2 Identifying a Technology’s Uses 77 3.3.3 The Value Chain for Target Applications 77 3.3.4 Identifying Stakeholders in the Value Chain 78 3.3.5 Designing Product Experiments 82 3.3.6 Customer Discovery and Validation Model 83 3.3.6.1 Customer Routines Analysis 85 3.4 Case Study: The Naval Research Laboratory’s Self-Decontaminating Material 89 3.4.1 The Challenge 90 3.4.2 The Scientist 90 3.4.3 The Problem 90 3.4.4 The Solution 90 3.4.5 The Future of the Technology and Future Applications 91 3.4.6 Technology Background and Advantages 91 3.4.7 Benefits 92 3.4.8 Problem 92 3.4.9 Technical Approach 93 3.4.10 Solution 93 3.4.11 Industrial Safety and Hygiene 96 3.4.12 Healthcare and Pharmaceuticals 97 3.4.13 First Response 98 Suggested Reading and Resources 101 Author Biography 101 4 Financing and Business Development for Hard Tech Startups 103 Bernard Lupien and Andrew Dougherty 4.1 Introduction 103 4.2 Challenges in Financing Hard Tech Startups 104 4.2.1 Balancing Ambition with Reality 104 4.2.2 Hard Tech Sure Is Not Software 104 4.2.3 Hard Tech Investors Are a Skeptical Bunch 105 4.2.4 What Do You Mean I Will Not Exit for $1B? 105 4.2.5 Hard Tech Fundraising Dissonance 106 4.3 Fundraising the Right Way 108 4.3.1 What Kind of Investors Should You Raise from? 108 4.3.1.1 Friends and Family 109 4.3.1.2 Angels 109 4.3.1.3 Early-Stage Institutional Venture Capitalists 110 4.3.1.4 Late-Stage Institutional Venture Capitalists 110 4.3.1.5 Corporate Venture Capital 111 4.3.2 Venture Capital Uncovered 112 4.3.2.1 Fund Life 112 4.3.2.2 Return the Fund 112 4.3.2.3 The Mythical 10× and Why It Is Important to You 113 4.3.3 How to Generate Interest from Investors? 114 4.3.3.1 Team 115 4.3.3.2 Differentiated Technology and Customer Value Proposition 115 4.3.3.3 Large Target Market 115 4.3.3.4 Compelling Plan to Build a Business 116 4.4 The Case for Early-Stage Business Development 119 4.4.1.1 Playbook for Early-Stage Business Development 121 4.4.1.2 Getting Started 121 4.4.1.3 Getting to the Finish Line 122 4.4.1.4 Avoiding Common Pitfalls 123 4.5 Summary 125 Suggested Reading 128 Author Biographies 128 5 Battery Entrepreneurship: Gameboard from Lab to Market 129 Elena V. Timofeeva, John P. Katsoudas, Carlo U. Segre, Alex Duchak, and Thomas Day 5.1 Introduction 129 5.2 Finding a Market Fit for Your Technology 131 5.3 Energy Storage Markets 133 5.3.1 Portable Electronics, Drones, and Medical Devices 134 5.3.2 Grid Energy Storage and Renewable Energy 134 5.3.3 Industrial Batteries and Back-up Power 136 5.3.4 Home Energy Storage 136 5.3.5 Electric Vehicles 137 5.3.5.1 Passenger Cars 137 5.3.5.2 Light Electric Utility Vehicles 137 5.3.5.3 Heavy-duty Utility Vehicles, Trucks, and Buses 138 5.3.6 Other Nascent Energy Storage Markets 138 5.3.7 Airplanes 138 5.3.8 Ships and Boats 139 5.4 Battery Startup Case Studies 139 5.4.1 Boston Power 140 5.4.2 A123 Systems 141 5.4.3 Aquion Energy 143 5.4.4 Tesla 144 5.4.5 Fluidic Energy 145 5.4.6 Envia Systems 146 5.4.7 Alevo 147 5.4.8 SiNode/Nanograf 148 5.4.9 Sakti3 149 5.4.10 Cadenza Innovation 150 5.4.11 24M Technologies 151 5.5 Lessons Learned from the Case Studies 152 5.5.1 Market Challenges 152 5.5.2 Technical Challenges 153 5.5.3 Financial Challenges 154 5.5.4 Team Challenges 154 5.6 Strategies for Startups and Academic Inventors 154 5.6.1 Funding Strategy 155 5.6.2 Strategic Partnerships 158 5.6.3 Intellectual Property (IP) Management Strategy 159 5.6.4 Technology Licensing 162 5.6.5 Press Relations (PR) and Marketing Strategies 162 5.7 Summary 163 Further Reading 165 Author Biographies 165 6 Growing a Business in the Chemical Industry 169 Michael Lefenfeld 6.1 Introduction 169 6.2 Strategic Market Segmentation 172 6.2.1 Do I Have a Solution to an Existing Problem or a Solution Looking for a Problem? 173 6.2.2 A Solution Looking for a Problem 174 6.2.3 A Problem Looking for a Solution 175 6.2.4 The Opportunity Matrix: A Roadmap for Scaling a Chemical Business 177 6.2.5 Find the Right Niche 180 6.2.6 Sometimes a Pivot Strategy Can Work 182 6.2.7 Select the Best Path to Market 183 6.2.8 Licensing vs. Manufacturing 184 6.2.9 Strategic Market Assessment 186 6.3 Building Economies of Scale 189 6.3.1 Gaining Customer Traction 190 6.3.2 Customer Testimonials 191 6.3.3 Pricing Models 191 6.3.4 Market Entry and Initial Sales 192 6.3.5 Focus on Measured Growth 193 6.3.6 Direct Sales vs. Distributors 193 6.3.7 Testing and Pivoting 194 6.4 Growing to Commercial Scale 196 6.4.1 Best Practices 196 6.4.2 Financing 197 6.4.3 Growth Constraints 199 6.4.4 Primary and Secondary Markets 199 6.4.5 Insource vs. Outsource 200 6.4.6 Growing Too Fast 201 6.4.7 Hidden Landmines 203 6.4.8 Overcoming Competitive Threats 203 6.4.9 Case Study 205 6.4.9.1 ActiveEOR for the CHOPS Oil Sector 205 6.4.9.2 New Market Strategy 206 6.4.9.3 Introducing a New Chemical to the Oil Market 206 6.4.9.4 Proof of Concept 207 6.5 Summary 208 Suggested Reading 211 Author Biography 211 7 New Models to Foster Big Pharma and Chemistry Entrepreneurship 213 Antonio Gómez 7.1 Introduction 213 7.2 Setting the Stage 214 7.3 Big Pharma and the Open Innovation Model 216 7.3.1 Universities/Research Institutions 218 7.3.2 Biotech Companies 219 7.3.3 Venture Capital 219 7.3.4 Patient Associations and Charities 220 7.3.5 Public Administrations 221 7.3.6 Contract Research Organizations (CROs) 221 7.4 Considerations for Would-Be Entrepreneurs 222 7.4.1 General Reflections on Collaborations with Big Pharma (the How) 222 7.4.2 Areas of Collaboration Between Chemical Companies and Big Pharma (the What) 225 7.4.2.1 Compound Providers: Custom Synthesis 225 7.4.2.2 Medicinal Chemistry-Based Biotechs 228 7.4.2.3 Cheminformatics-Based Startups 228 7.4.2.4 Getting Information from X-ray Diffraction Studies 229 7.4.2.5 Other Areas 230 7.4.3 Getting in Touch (the Where) 231 7.5 Novel Business Models 232 7.6 Case Study: JJI and the I2D2 Initiative 235 7.7 Summary 237 Author Biography 240 8 The Economic Need for Chemically Based Start-Up Companies 241 Daniel Daly 8.1 Introduction 241 8.2 Promising Programs 244 8.2.1 NSF’s I-Corps (Innovation Corps) Program 244 8.2.2 I-Corps Teams or National Cohorts 246 8.2.3 I-Corps Sites 249 8.2.4 I-Corps Nodes 249 8.2.5 Case Study 249 8.2.6 Non-dilutive Funding Opportunities 250 8.2.7 Angel Funding: Dilutive Funding 252 8.2.8 Accelerators 252 8.3 Other Potential Programs 253 8.3.1 Case Studies 256 8.3.1.1 Evotec 256 8.3.1.2 CatSci 256 8.3.2 Agile Innovation Teams 257 8.3.3 Case Studies 257 8.3.3.1 525 Solutions, Inc. 257 8.3.3.2 ThruPore Technologies 259 8.4 Summary 260 Recommended Reading 262 Author Biography 262 Index 263

Read more less

Book SynopsisNonlinear Optics on Ferroic Materials Covering the fruitful combination of nonlinear optics and ferroic materials! The use of nonlinear optics for the study of ferroics, that is, magnetically, electrically or otherwise spontaneously ordered and switchable materials has witnessed a remarkable development since its inception with the invention of the laser in the 1960s. This book on Nonlinear Optics on Ferroic Materials reviews and advances an overarching concept of ferroic order and its exploration by nonlinear-optical methods. In doing so, it brings together three fields of physics: symmetry, ferroic order, and nonlinear laser spectroscopy. It begins by introducing the fundamentals for each of these fields. The book then discusses how nonlinear optical studies help to reveal properties of ferroic materials that are often inaccessible with other methods. In this, consequent use is made of the unique degrees of freedom inherent to optical experiments. An excursion into the theoretical foundations of nonlinear optical processes in ferroics rounds off the discussion. The final part of the book explores classes of ferroic materials of primary interest. In particular, this covers multiferroics with magnetoelectric correlations and oxide-electronic heterostructures. An outlook towards materials exhibiting novel forms of ferroic states or correlated arrangements beyond ferroic order and the study these systems by nonlinear optics concludes the work. The book is aimed equally at experienced scientists and young researchers at the interface between condensed-matter physics and optics and with a taste for bold, innovative ideas.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgements xv 1 A Preview of the Subject of the Book 1 1.1 Symmetry Considerations 1 1.2 Ferroic Materials 3 1.3 Laser Optics 6 1.4 Creating the Trinity 8 1.5 Structure of this Book 10 Part I The Ingredients and Their Combination 11 2 Symmetry 13 2.1 Describing Interactions in Condensed-Matter Systems 13 2.2 Introduction to Practical Group Theory 15 2.3 Crystals 16 2.3.1 Types of Symmetry Operations 17 2.3.2 Combinations of Operations 20 2.3.3 Nomenclature 20 2.4 Point Groups and Space Groups 21 2.4.1 Point Groups 21 2.4.2 Space Groups 24 2.5 From Symmetries to Properties 25 2.5.1 Deriving the Components of the Property Tensors 25 2.5.2 Parity of the Property Tensors 25 2.5.3 Introducing Inhomogeneity 26 2.5.4 Beyond Group Theory: Particularisation 28 3 Ferroic Materials 31 3.1 Ferroic Phase Transitions 32 3.1.1 Landau-Theoretical Description and Order Parameter 33 3.1.2 First- and Second-Order Phase Transitions 34 3.1.3 Critical Exponents 36 3.1.4 Domain States and Domains 37 3.1.5 Softness 39 3.2 Ferroic States 41 3.2.1 Conjugate Field and Switchability 41 3.2.2 Hysteresis 42 3.2.3 Curie Temperature 42 3.3 Antiferroic States 43 3.4 Classification of Ferroics 44 3.4.1 Ferromagnetism 46 3.4.2 Ferroelectricity 56 3.4.3 Ferroelasticity 64 3.4.4 Ferrotoroidicity 68 3.4.5 Other Forms of Primary Ferroic Order 76 3.4.6 Higher-Order Ferroics 78 3.4.7 Multiferroics 81 4 Nonlinear Optics 91 4.1 Interaction of Materials with the Electromagnetic Radiation Field 93 4.1.1 Hamilton Operator 93 4.1.2 Multipole Expansion 95 4.2 Wave Equation in Nonlinear Optics 97 4.2.1 Derivation of the Wave Equation with an Extended Source Term 98 4.2.2 General Solution of the Wave Equation 99 4.2.3 Four Solutions of Particular Interest 101 4.3 Microscopic Sources of Nonlinear Optical Effects 103 4.4 Important Nonlinear Optical Processes 107 4.4.1 Two-Photon Sum Frequency Generation 108 4.4.2 Second Harmonic Generation 108 4.4.3 Two-Photon Difference Frequency Generation 109 4.4.4 Optical Parametric Generation 109 4.4.5 Third Harmonic Generation 109 4.5 Nonlinear Spectroscopy of Electronic States 110 4.5.1 Transition Matrix Elements 110 4.5.2 Resonance Behaviour at the Contributing Frequencies 110 4.5.3 Local-Field Corrections 110 4.5.4 Linear Optical Properties at the Contributing Frequencies 111 4.5.5 Phase Matching 111 5 Experimental Aspects 113 5.1 Laser Sources 113 5.1.1 Nanosecond Laser Systems with Optical Parametric Oscillator 114 5.1.2 Femtosecond Laser Systems with Optical Parametric Amplifier 115 5.2 Experimental Set-Ups 116 5.2.1 Spectral Resolution 117 5.2.2 Imaging by Projection 127 5.2.3 Imaging by Scanning 133 5.3 Temporal Resolution 134 6 Nonlinear Optics on Ferroics – An Instructive Example 137 6.1 SHG Contributions from Antiferromagnetic Cr 2 O 3 140 6.2 SHG Spectroscopy 146 6.3 Topography on Antiferromagnetic Domains 149 6.4 Magnetic Structure in the Spin-Flop Phase 152 Part II Novel Functionalities 155 7 The Unique Degrees of Freedom of Optical Experiments 157 7.1 Polarisation-Dependent Spectroscopy 158 7.1.1 Basic Methodical Aspects 158 7.1.2 Resonance Enhancement of Signals 159 7.1.3 Sublattice Selectivity 162 7.1.4 Separation of Coexisting Types of Order 164 7.1.5 Spectral Identification of Symmetries 166 7.2 Spatial Resolution – Domains 167 7.2.1 Access to Hidden Domain States 168 7.2.2 Domain Microscopy at Different Resolution 171 7.2.3 Domain Topography Below the Optical Resolution Limit 173 7.2.4 Domain Topography in Three Dimensions 178 7.3 Temporal Resolution – Correlation Dynamics 181 7.3.1 Overview 181 7.3.2 Dynamical Properties of Ferromagnetic Systems 186 7.3.3 Dynamical Processes in Antiferromagnetic Systems 190 7.3.4 Nonlinear Effects in the Few-Terahertz Range 196 8 Theoretical Aspects 201 8.1 Microscopic Sources of SHG in Ferromagnetic Metals 202 8.2 Microscopic Sources of SHG in Antiferromagnetic Insulators 203 8.2.1 Chromium Sesquioxide 203 8.2.2 Hexagonal Manganites 207 8.2.3 Nickel Oxide 210 Part III Materials and Applications 211 9 SHG and Multiferroics with Magnetoelectric Correlations 213 9.1 Type-I Multiferroics – The Hexagonal Manganites 214 9.1.1 Synthesis and Crystal Structure 214 9.1.2 Lattice Trimerisation 215 9.1.3 Antiferromagnetic Order of the Mn 3+ Lattice 231 9.1.4 Magnetic Order of the Rare-Earth System 243 9.1.5 Magnetic Sublattice Interactions 247 9.1.6 Magnetoelectric Sublattice Interactions 250 9.1.7 Dynamic Correlations 259 9.2 Type-I Multiferroics – BiFeO 3 262 9.2.1 Synthesis and Crystal Structure 262 9.2.2 Ferroelectric Order 264 9.2.3 Antiferromagnetic Order 264 9.2.4 Magnetoelectric Coupling Effects 266 9.3 Type-I Multiferroics with Strain-Induced Ferroelectricity 275 9.4 Type-II Multiferroics – MnWO 4 278 9.4.1 Synthesis and Crystal Structure 278 9.4.2 Multiferroic Order 279 9.4.3 SHG Contributions – Incommensurate SHG 280 9.4.4 Types of Domains 284 9.4.5 Poling Dynamics 287 9.4.6 Multiferroic Domain Walls 289 9.5 Type-II Multiferroics – TbMn 2 O 5 291 9.5.1 Synthesis, Crystal Structure, and Magnetic Order 291 9.5.2 Decomposition of Contributions to the Spontaneous Polarisation 292 9.6 Type-II Multiferroics – TbMnO 3 295 9.6.1 Synthesis, Crystal Structure, and Magnetic Order 295 9.6.2 Domains and Poling 295 9.6.3 Optical Domain Switching 297 9.6.4 Robustness of the Multiferroic State 302 9.7 Type-II Multiferroics with Higher-Order Domain Functionalities 304 9.7.1 Magnetoelectric Inversion of a Domain Pattern 305 9.7.2 Magnetoelectric ‘Teleportation’ of a Domain Pattern 309 10 SHG and Materials with Novel Types of Primary Ferroic Orders 313 10.1 Ferrotoroidics 314 10.1.1 Ferrotoroidic LiCoPO 4 314 10.1.2 Ferrotoroidics Other than LiCoPO 4 320 10.1.3 Status of Ferrotoroidicity as Primary Ferroic Order 324 10.2 Ferro-Axial Order – RbFe(MoO 4) 2 325 10.2.1 Structure and Phase Transitions 325 10.2.2 Ferroic Nature of the Rotational Transition 326 11 SHG and Oxide Electronics – Thin Films and Heterostructures 329 11.1 Growth Techniques 330 11.1.1 Pulsed-Laser Deposition 331 11.1.2 Molecular Beam Epitaxy 332 11.1.3 Sputter Deposition 332 11.1.4 Metal-Organic Chemical Vapour Deposition 333 11.2 Thin Epitaxial Oxide Films with Magnetic Order 334 11.2.1 Ferrimagnetic Garnets 334 11.2.2 Ferromagnetic Metals 334 11.2.3 EuO – A Ferromagnetic Insulator 336 11.3 Thin Epitaxial Oxide Films with Ferroelectric Order 341 11.3.1 Crystal Structure and Domain Configurations: BiFeO 3 342 11.3.2 From Domains to Domain Walls: SrMnO 3 345 11.3.3 Internal Structure of Domain Walls: Pbzr X Ti 1−x O 3 347 11.3.4 From Domain Walls to Interfaces: LaAlO 3 on SrTiO 3 350 11.4 Poling Dynamics in Ferroelectric Thin Films 357 11.5 Growth Dynamics in Oxide Electronics by In Situ SHG Probing 361 11.5.1 Early ISHG Experiments 362 11.5.2 Experimental Set-Up for ISHG 363 11.5.3 Emergence of Ferroelectric Order in a Single Film 365 11.5.4 From Single Films to Multi-Layer Heterostructure 367 11.5.5 From Multi-Layer Heterostructures to Symmetry Engineering 368 11.5.6 Growth Dynamics – Interaction Between Materials 370 11.5.7 Growth Dynamics – Interaction Between Interfaces 372 12 Nonlinear Optics on Ordered States Beyond Ferroics 375 12.1 Superconductors 375 12.2 Metamaterials – Photonic Crystals 379 12.2.1 Optical Properties 380 12.2.2 Ferroic Properties 380 12.2.3 Quasicrystalline Metamaterials 382 12.3 Topological Insulators 384 Part IV Epilogue 387 13 A Retrospect of the Subject of the Book 389 References 393 Index 443

Read more less

Book SynopsisA practical guide to ICP emission spectrometry, updated with information on the latest developments and applications The revised and updated third edition of ICP Emission Spectrometry contains all the essential information needed for successful ICP OES analyses. In addition, the third edition reflects the most recent developments and applications in the field. Filled with illustrative examples and written in a user-friendly style, the book contains material on the instrumentation instructions on how to develop effective methods. Throughout the text, the author—a noted expert on the topic—incorporates typical questions and problems and provides checklists and detailed instructions for implementation. The third edition includes 10 new chapters that cover recent progress in both the application and methodology of the technology. New information on plasma, the optics, and the detector of the spectrometer is also highlighted. This revised third edition: Contains fresh chapters on the newest developments Presents several new chapters on plasma as well as the optics and the detector of the spectrometer Offers a helpful troubleshooting guide as well as examples of practical applications Includes myriad illustrative examples Written for lab technicians, students, environmental chemists, water chemists, soil chemists, soil scientists, geochemists, and materials scientists, ICP Emission Spectrometry, Third Edition continues to offer the basics for successful ICP OES analyses and has been updated with the latest developments and applications. Table of ContentsForeword ix Preface xi 1 An Overview 1 1.1 Features of ICP-OES 1 1.2 Inductively Coupled Plasma Optical Emission Spectrometry – the Name Describes the Technique 2 1.3 Distribution of ICP-OES 4 1.4 Related Techniques for Elemental Analysis 4 1.5 Terms 8 2 Plasma 9 2.1 The Spectrometric Plasma 9 2.1.1 The Operating Gas 10 2.1.1.1 Argon 10 2.1.1.2 Addition of Air or Oxygen 11 2.1.2 Plasma Torch 12 2.1.3 Ignition of the Plasma 15 2.1.4 Orientation of the Plasma with Respect to the Torch 15 2.2 Excitation to Emit Electromagnetic Radiation (Light) 16 2.2.1 Emission Lines 16 2.2.2 Energy and Temperature 19 2.2.3 Spectroscopic Properties of the ICP 22 2.2.4 Plasma Viewing 28 2.2.4.1 Radial Viewing 29 2.2.4.2 Axial Viewing 30 2.2.4.3 Radial and Axial Viewing in One Instrument (“Dual View”) 31 2.3 Excitation Unit 35 2.3.1 Radio Frequency Generator 35 2.3.2 Induction Coil 38 2.4 Sample Introduction System 38 2.4.1 Nebulizer 40 2.4.1.1 Pneumatic Nebulizers 41 2.4.1.2 High-Pressure Nebulizer 45 2.4.1.3 Ultrasonic Nebulizer 46 2.4.2 Nebulizer Chamber 48 2.4.2.1 Tasks of the Nebulizer Chamber 48 2.4.2.2 Temperature of the Nebulizer Chamber 49 2.4.2.3 Materials and Surface Properties 52 2.4.2.4 Common Types of Nebulizer Chambers 54 2.4.2.5 Waste from the Nebulizer Chamber 55 2.4.3 Pump 56 2.4.4 Other Forms of Sample Introduction 59 2.4.4.1 Special Techniques for Liquid Samples 60 2.4.4.2 Gaseous Samples 60 2.4.4.3 Solid Sampling 63 3 Optics and Detector of the Spectrometer 67 3.1 Basic Principles of Optics 67 3.1.1 Resolution 67 3.1.2 Relevant Optical Terms 72 3.1.3 Optical Mounts 76 3.1.3.1 Paschen–Runge Mount 76 3.1.3.2 Czerny–TurnerMount 76 3.1.3.3 Echelle Mount 78 3.1.3.4 Littrow Mount 80 3.1.4 Light Transfer from the Plasma to the Optics 80 3.1.4.1 Separation of Plasma Compartment and Optics 80 3.1.4.2 Transparency of the Optics in the Vacuum-UV Range 82 3.2 Detectors 85 3.2.1 Photomultiplier Tube (PMT) 86 3.2.2 Solid-State Detectors 87 3.3 Types of Emission Spectrometer Mounts 95 3.3.1 Classical Spectrometers 96 3.3.1.1 Monochromators 96 3.3.1.2 Polychromators 96 3.3.2 Array Spectrometers 97 3.3.2.1 Scanning Array Spectrometers 97 3.3.2.2 Simultaneous Array Spectrometers 97 4 Method Development 99 4.1 Wavelength Selection 101 4.1.1 Working Range 101 4.1.1.1 Background Equivalent Concentration (BEC) 102 4.1.2 Freedom from Spectral Interference 103 4.1.2.1 Generation of Spectra for the Estimation of the Background 107 4.1.2.2 Generation of Spectra for Detecting Interfering Lines from the Matrix 111 4.1.2.3 Evaluating Spectra 114 4.2 Processing and Correction Techniques 117 4.2.1 Signal Processing 117 4.2.1.1 Calculation of the Peak Height 117 4.2.1.2 Calculation of the Peak Area or of the Partial Peak Area 119 4.2.1.3 Calibration of the Peak Position 122 4.2.2 Background Correction 123 4.2.2.1 Calculation of the Background Correction 126 4.2.2.2 Number the Background Correction Points 128 4.2.3 Impact of Peak Processing and Background Correction on Detection Limits 132 4.2.4 Correction of Spectral Interference 137 4.2.4.1 Inter-element Correction 137 4.2.4.2 Correction Using Multivariate Regression 138 4.2.4.3 Multivariate Regression and Inter-element Correction 147 4.3 Non-spectral Interference 147 4.3.1 Correction of Non-spectral Interference 148 4.3.1.1 Matrix Matching 148 4.3.1.2 Internal Standard 149 4.3.1.3 Calibration with Analyte Addition (Standard Addition) 151 4.3.1.4 Further Measures to Compensate for Non-spectral Interference 153 4.4 Optimization 153 4.4.1 Optimization Goals 154 4.4.2 Optimization Parameters 155 4.4.3 Optimization Algorithms 155 4.5 Validation 157 4.5.1 Accuracy and Specificity 157 4.5.2 Reproducibility 159 4.5.3 Limit of Detection 160 4.5.4 Working Range 164 4.5.5 Robustness 166 5 Routine Analysis 169 5.1 Preparation 169 5.1.1 Sample Preparation 169 5.1.2 Warm-up Time 170 5.1.3 Delay and Rinse Times 171 5.2 Calibration 173 5.2.1 Calibration Solutions 173 5.2.1.1 Number of Calibration Solutions 173 5.2.1.2 Concentrations in Calibration Solutions 174 5.2.1.3 Multielement Calibration Solutions 176 5.2.1.4 Multi-bottle Calibration 176 5.2.1.5 Stability of Calibration Solutions 177 5.2.2 Calibration Functions 177 5.2.2.1 External Calibration 178 5.2.2.2 Calibration by Analyte Addition (Standard Addition) 179 5.2.2.3 Bracketing Calibration 179 5.2.3 Examination of the Calibration Data 181 5.3 Quality Assurance 182 5.4 Software and Data Processing 184 6 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 187 7 Applications 197 7.1 General Notes 197 7.1.1 Material of Containers 197 7.1.2 Stability of Solutions 197 7.1.3 Matrix Effects 198 7.1.4 Contaminations 198 7.2 Comments on Selected Elements 198 7.3 Selected Applications 200 7.3.1 Environment 201 7.3.1.1 Drinking, Ground, and SurfaceWater 202 7.3.1.2 Wastewater, Leachates 202 7.3.1.3 Sludges 204 7.3.1.4 Soil Samples, Sediments 204 7.3.1.5 Airborne Particles, Fly Ashes 205 7.3.2 Samples of Biological Origin 206 7.3.2.1 Plant and Animal Samples 206 7.3.2.2 Clinical and Forensic Materials 207 7.3.2.3 Food and Animal Feeds 208 7.3.3 Geological Materials 208 7.3.4 Metallurgy 210 7.3.4.1 Steel and Iron Matrices 210 7.3.4.2 Nonferrous Metals 212 7.3.4.3 Noble Metals 212 7.3.4.4 Special Alloys 212 7.3.5 Material Sciences 213 7.3.5.1 Semiconductors 213 7.3.5.2 Ceramics 215 7.3.6 Industrial Applications 215 7.3.6.1 Industrial Chemicals and Fertilizers 215 7.3.6.2 Galvanizing/Electroplating Baths 216 7.3.6.3 Brines and Salts 216 7.3.6.4 Cement, Gypsum, Calcium Matrix 216 7.3.6.5 Glass 217 7.3.6.6 Other Industrial Applications 218 7.3.7 Organic Solvents 218 7.3.7.1 Wear Metals and Contamination in Oil 221 7.3.7.2 Additives 223 7.3.7.3 Tar 223 7.3.7.4 Edible Oils 223 8 Procurement of Equipment and Preparation of the Laboratory 225 8.1 Which Atomic Spectrometric Technique is the Most Suitable? 225 8.2 Which ICP Emission Spectrometer is the Most Suitable? 227 8.3 Preparation of the Laboratory 230 References 233 Index 269

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents an up-to-date overview of the rapidly growing field of carbene transformations Carbene transformations have had an enormous impact on catalysis and organometallic chemistry. With the growth of transition metal-catalyzed carbene transformations in recent decades, carbene transformations are today an important compound class in organic synthesis as well as in the pharmaceutical and agrochemical industries. Edited by leading experts in the field, Transition Metal-Catalyzed Carbene Transformations is a thorough summary of the most recent advances in the rapidly expanding research area. This authoritative volume covers different reaction types such as ring forming reactions and rearrangement reactions, details their conditions and properties, and provides readers with accurate information on a wide range of carbene reactions. Twelve in-depth chapters address topics including carbene C-H bond insertion in alkane functionalization, the application of engineered enzymes in asymmetric carbene transfer, progress in transition-metal-catalyzed cross-coupling using carbene precursors, and more. Throughout the text, the authors highlight novel catalytic systems, transformations, and applications of transition-metal-catalyzed carbene transfer. Highlights the dynamic nature of the field of transition-metal-catalyzed carbene transformations Summarizes the catalytic radical approach for selective carbene cyclopropanation, high enantioselectivity in X-H insertions, and bio-inspired carbene transformations Introduces chiral N,N'-dioxide and chiral guanidine-based catalysts and different transformations with gold catalysis Discusses approaches in cycloaddition reactions with metal carbenes and polymerization with carbene transformations Outlines multicomponent reactions through gem-difunctionalization and transition-metal-catalyzed cross-coupling using carbene precursors Transition Metal-Catalyzed Carbene Transformations is essential reading for all chemists involved in organometallics, including organic and inorganic chemists, catalytic chemists, and chemists working in industry.Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Alkane Functionalization by Metal-Catalyzed Carbene Insertion from Diazo Reagents 1 María Álvarez, Ana Caballero, and Pedro J. Pérez 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Chemo- and Regioselectivity 3 1.2.1 Definitions 3 1.2.2 Catalysts 5 1.2.3 Chemoselectivity 6 1.2.4 Regioselectivity 8 1.3 Enantioselectivity 9 1.4 Methane and Gaseous Alkanes as Substrates 14 1.5 Alkane Nucleophilicity Scale 18 1.6 Conclusions and Outlook 22 Acknowledgments 22 References 22 2 Catalytic Radical Approach for Selective Carbene Transfers via Cobalt(II)-Based Metalloradical Catalysis 25 Xiaoxu Wang and X. Peter Zhang 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 Intermolecular Radical Cyclopropanation of Alkenes 26 2.2.1 Cyclopropanation with Acceptor-Substituted Diazo Compounds 27 2.2.2 Cyclopropanation with Acceptor/Acceptor-Substituted Diazo Compounds 32 2.2.3 Cyclopropanation with Donor-Substituted Diazo Compounds 37 2.3 Intramolecular Radical Cyclopropanation of Alkenes 39 2.4 Intermolecular Radical Cyclopropenation of Alkynes 43 2.5 Intramolecular Radical Alkylation of C(sp3)–H Bonds 44 2.5.1 Intramolecular C–H Alkylation with Acceptor/Acceptor-Substituted Diazo Compounds 45 2.5.2 Intramolecular C−H Alkylation with Donor-Substituted Diazo Compounds 46 2.6 Other Catalytic Radical Processes for Carbene Transfers 54 2.7 Summary and Outlook 59 Acknowledgment 60 References 60 3 Catalytic Enantioselective Carbene Insertions into Heteroatom–Hydrogen Bonds 67 Ming-Yao Huang, Shou-Fei Zhu, and Qi-Lin Zhou 3.1 Introduction 67 3.2 N—H Bond Insertion Reactions 67 3.2.1 Chiral Metal Catalysts 68 3.2.1.1 Chiral Cu Catalysts 68 3.2.1.2 Chiral Pd Catalysts 70 3.2.1.3 Other Chiral Metal Catalysts 70 3.2.1.4 Enzymes 72 3.2.1.5 Chiral Proton-Transfer Shuttle Catalysts 72 3.2.1.6 Chiral Phosphoric Acids as CPTS Catalysts 72 3.2.1.7 Chiral Amino Thioureas as CPTS Catalysts 73 3.3 O—H Bond Insertion Reactions 74 3.3.1 Chiral Metal Catalysts 74 3.3.1.1 Chiral Cu Catalysts 74 3.3.1.2 Chiral Fe Catalysts 76 3.3.1.3 Chiral Pd Catalysts 77 3.3.1.4 Chiral Au Catalysts 78 3.3.1.5 Chiral Bases as CPTS Catalysts 78 3.3.1.6 Chiral Phosphoric Acids as CPTS Catalysts 79 3.4 S—H Bond Insertion Reactions 80 3.4.1 Chiral Metal Catalysts 80 3.4.2 CPTS Catalysts 81 3.4.3 Enzymes 81 3.5 F—H Bond Insertion Reactions 82 3.6 Si—H Bond Insertion Reactions 83 3.6.1 Chiral Rh Catalysts 83 3.6.2 Chiral Cu Catalysts 85 3.6.3 Other Chiral Metal Catalysts 86 3.6.4 Enzymes 87 3.7 B—H Bond Insertion Reactions 88 3.7.1 Chiral Cu Catalysts 88 3.7.2 Chiral Rhodium Catalysts 89 3.7.3 Enzymes 89 3.8 Summary and Outlook 90 References 91 4 Engineering Enzymes for New-to-Nature Carbene Chemistry 95 Soumitra V. Athavale, Kai Chen, and Frances H. Arnold 4.1 Introduction: Biology Inspires Chemistry Inspires Biology 95 4.2 P411-Catalyzed Cyclopropanation 99 4.3 The Workflow of Directed Evolution 101 4.4 Expanding Cyclopropanation with Diverse Hemeprotein Carbene Transferases 102 4.5 C–H Functionalization with Carbene Transferases 109 4.6 Biocatalytic Carbene X–H Insertion 113 4.7 Carbene Transfer Reactions with Artificial Metalloproteins 118 4.8 Structural Studies of Carbene Intermediates in Heme Proteins 125 4.9 Summary 128 Acknowledgments 129 References 129 5 Metal Carbene Cycloaddition Reactions 139 Kostiantyn O. Marichev, Haifeng Zheng, and Michael P. Doyle 5.1 Introduction 139 5.2 [3+1]-Cycloaddition 142 5.3 [3+2]-Cycloaddition 145 5.3.1 [3+2]-Cycloaddition with Imines and Indoles 145 5.3.2 [3+2]-Cycloaddition with Polarized Alkenes 149 5.3.3 [3+2]-Cycloaddition with Nitrones 150 5.3.4 Divergent Behavior of Catalysts 151 5.4 [3+3]-Cycloaddition of Enoldiazo Compounds 152 5.4.1 [3+3]-Cycloaddition with Nitrones 152 5.4.2 [3+3]-Cycloaddition with Pyridinium Ylides and Hydrazones 155 5.4.3 Diastereoselective [3+3]-Cycloaddition with Achiral Catalysts 157 5.4.4 [3+3]-Cycloaddition with Diaziridines 158 5.4.5 [3+3]-Cycloaddition with Donor–Acceptor Cyclopropanes and Oxiranes 159 5.5 [3+4]-Cycloaddition 160 5.6 [3+5]-Cycloaddition 161 5.7 Summary 162 References 163 6 Metal-Catalyzed Decarbenations by Retro-Cyclopropanation 169 Mauro Mato and Antonio M. Echavarren 6.1 Introduction 169 6.2 Reactivity and Generation of Metal Carbenes 169 6.2.1 Decomposition of Diazo Compounds 170 6.2.2 Alternative Methods for the Generation of Metal Carbenes 170 6.2.3 Decarbenation Reactions: General Process and Definition 170 6.3 Retro-Cyclopropanation Reactions: A Historical Walkthrough 171 6.3.1 Early Observations 171 6.3.2 Decarbenation Reactions from Gas Phase to Solution 173 6.3.3 The Discovery of the Gold(I)-Catalyzed Retro-Buchner Reaction 173 6.4 Metal-Catalyzed Aromative-Decarbenation Reactions: A Mechanistic Analysis 175 6.4.1 Basic Mechanistic Picture 175 6.4.2 Alternative Generation of the Same Carbenes from Carbenoids 175 6.4.3 Theoretical Studies on the Mechanism of the Retro-Buchner Reaction 177 6.4.4 Second-Generation Cycloheptatrienes: Low Temperature and Other Metals 179 6.4.5 Mechanism of the Rh(II)-Catalyzed Aromative Decarbenation 181 6.5 Synthetic Methodologies and Applications 181 6.5.1 Cyclopropanation Reactions 181 6.5.1.1 Aryl Cyclopropanations 183 6.5.1.2 Alkenyl Cyclopropanations 184 6.5.1.3 Reactions with Furans 185 6.5.2 Higher Formal Cycloadditions 186 6.5.2.1 (4+1) Cycloadditions 187 6.5.2.2 (3+2) Cycloadditions 187 6.5.2.3 (4+3) Cycloadditions 189 6.5.3 Intramolecular Friedel–Crafts Reactivity 190 6.5.4 Insertion Reactions 190 6.5.4.1 C–H Insertion 190 6.5.4.2 Si–H Insertion 192 6.5.5 Oxidation Reactions 192 6.5.6 Alternative Precursors 193 6.5.7 Decarbenations Based on the Release of Alkenes 193 6.6 General Outlook and Concluding Remarks 195 References 196 7 Gold-Catalyzed Oxidation of Alkynes by N-Oxides or Sulfoxides 199 Kaylaa Gutman, Tianyou Li, and Liming Zhang 7.1 Introduction: Gold-Activated Alkynes Attacked by Nucleophilic Oxidants 199 7.2 Sulfoxides as Nucleophilic Oxidants 201 7.3 N-Oxides as Nucleophilic Oxidants 202 7.3.1 Reactions of Carbene/Carbenoid Intermediates with Oxygen-Based Nucleophiles 205 7.3.2 Reactions of Carbene/Carbenoid Intermediates with Nitrogen-Based Nucleophiles 212 7.3.3 Reactions of Carbene/Carbenoid Intermediates with Other Heteronucleophiles 214 7.3.4 Friedel–Crafts Reactions of Carbene/Carbenoid Intermediates with Arenes 215 7.3.5 Reactions of Carbene/Carbenoid Intermediates with Alkenes 218 7.3.6 Reactions of Carbene/Carbenoid Intermediates with C—C Triple Bonds 224 7.3.7 1,2-C–C and 1,2-C–H Insertions of Carbene/Carbenoid Intermediates 226 7.3.8 Remote C(sp3)–H Functionalizations by Carbene/Carbenoid Intermediates 231 7.4 Conclusion 238 References 238 8 Transition-Metal-Catalyzed Carbene Transformations for Polymer Syntheses 243 Eiji Ihara and Hiroaki Shimomoto 8.1 Introduction 243 8.2 Transition-Metal-Catalyzed C1 Polymerization of Diazoacetates 243 8.2.1 PdCl2 -Initiated Polymerization 244 8.2.2 (NHC)Pd(nq)/Borate-Initiated Polymerization 245 8.2.3 π-AllylPdCl-Based System-Initiated Polymerization 246 8.2.4 (nq)2 Pd/Borate- and (cod)PdCl(Cl-nq)/Borate-Initiated Polymerization 251 8.2.5 Preparation of Polymers with Densely Packed Functional Groups Around Polymer Main Chain 254 8.2.5.1 Hydroxy Group-Containing Polymers 254 8.2.5.2 Oligo(oxyethylene)-Containing Polymers 256 8.2.5.3 Pyrene-Containing Polymers 257 8.2.5.4 Fluoroalkyl and Fluoroaryl Group-Containing Polymers 258 8.3 Polycondensation of Bis(diazocarbonyl) Compounds 259 8.3.1 Three-Component Polycondensation of Bis(diazocarbonyl) Compound, Diol, and THF 259 8.3.2 Three-Component Polycondensation of Bis(diazocarbonyl) Compound, Dicarboxylic Acid, and THF 262 8.3.3 Three-Component Polycondensation of Bis(diazocarbonyl) Compound, Enol-form of 1,3-Diketone, and THF 263 8.3.4 Two-Component Polycondensation of Bis(diazocarbonyl) Compound with Aromatic Diamine 264 8.3.5 Single-Component Polycondensation of Bis(diazocarbonyl) Compound to Afford Unsaturated Polyesters 264 8.3.6 Single-Component Polycondensation of Bis(diazocarbonyl) Compound to Afford Poly(arylene vinylene)s (PAV) 265 8.4 Concluding Remarks 266 References 266 9 Metal-Catalyzed Quinoid Carbene (QC) Transfer Reactions 269 Hai-Xu Wang, Vanessa K.-Y. Lo, and Chi-Ming Che 9.1 Introduction 269 9.2 Metal–Quinoid Carbene (QC) Complexes and Stoichiometric Reactivity 269 9.3 Metal-Catalyzed QC Transfer Reactions 273 9.3.1 Cyclopropanation Reactions 273 9.3.2 C(sp2)–H Insertion Reactions 275 9.3.3 C(sp3)–H Insertion Reactions 284 9.3.4 Nucleophilic Addition and Miscellaneous Reactions 286 9.4 Conclusion 293 Acknowledgment 295 References 295 10 Asymmetric Rearrangement and Insertion Reactions with Metal–Carbenoids Promoted by Chiral N,N ′ -Dioxide or Guanidine-Based Catalysts 299 Xiaobin Lin, Xiaohua Liu, and Xiaoming Feng 10.1 Introduction 299 10.2 The Introduction of Chiral N,N′ -Dioxide/Metal Complexes and Guanidine Catalysts 299 10.3 Chiral N,N′ -Dioxide/Metal Complexes-Catalyzed Rearrangement Reactions 302 10.4 Chiral Guanidine-Based Catalyst-Mediated Asymmetric Carbene Insertion Reactions 315 10.5 Conclusion and Outlook 323 References 323 11 Multi-Component Reaction via gem-Difunctionalization of Metal Carbene 325 Mengchu Zhang, Xinfang Xu, and Wenhao Hu 11.1 Introduction 325 11.2 Mannich-Type Interception 327 11.2.1 Interception of Ammonium Ylide 327 11.2.2 Interception of Oxonium Ylide 328 11.2.3 Interception of Zwitterionic Intermediate 339 11.3 Aldol-Type Interception 340 11.3.1 Interception of Ammonium Ylide 340 11.3.2 Interception of Oxonium Ylide 342 11.3.3 Interception of Zwitterionic Intermediate 343 11.4 Michael-Type Interception 345 11.4.1 Interception of Ammonium Ylide 345 11.4.2 Interception of Oxonium Ylide 346 11.4.3 Interception of Zwitterionic Intermediate 348 11.5 Miscellaneous Transformations 349 11.5.1 Interception Other Types of Active Intermediates 349 11.5.2 Interception of Active Intermediates with Other Electrophiles 353 11.5.3 Applications in Cascade Reactions 355 11.6 Synthetic Applications 358 11.6.1 Synthesis and Modification of Natural Products 358 11.6.2 Synthesis of Bioactive Molecules 362 11.7 Conclusion 364 References 365 12 Transition-Metal-Catalyzed Cross-Coupling with Carbene Precursors 371 Kang Wang and Jianbo Wang 12.1 Introduction 371 12.2 Palladium-Catalyzed Carbene Cross-Coupling Reactions 372 12.2.1 Diazo Compounds as Carbene Precursors 372 12.2.1.1 Reactions with Electrophiles 372 12.2.1.2 Reactions with Nucleophiles 373 12.2.1.3 Palladium-Catalyzed Cascade Cross-Coupling Reactions 374 12.2.2 N-Tosylhydrazones as Carbene Precursors 377 12.2.2.1 Reactions with Electrophiles 377 12.2.2.2 Reactions with Nucleophiles 379 12.2.2.3 Palladium-Catalyzed Cascade Cross-Coupling Reactions 380 12.2.3 Non-Diazo Compounds as Carbene Precursors 382 12.3 Copper-Catalyzed Carbene Cross-Coupling Reactions 385 12.3.1 Reactions with Terminal Alkynes 385 12.3.1.1 Multi-substituted Allenes as the Coupling Products 385 12.3.1.2 Internal Alkynes as the Coupling Products 386 12.3.2 Reactions with Other Coupling Partners 387 12.4 Rhodium-Catalyzed Carbene Cross-Coupling Reactions 388 12.4.1 Generating Organorhodium Species Through Transmetalation 388 12.4.2 Generating Organorhodium Species Through C—C Bond Cleavage 389 12.5 Transition-Metal-Catalyzed C—H Bond Functionalizations with Carbene Precursors 391 12.5.1 Non-Directing-Group-Assisted C—H Functionalizations 391 12.5.2 Directing-Group-Assisted C—H Bond Functionalizations 393 12.5.2.1 Generating Acyclic Products Through C—H Bond Activation 393 12.5.2.2 Generating Cyclic Products Through C—H Bond Activation 394 12.6 Conclusion Remarks 396 Acknowledgment 397 References 397 Index 401

Read more less

Book SynopsisHalide Perovskite Semiconductors Enables readers to acquire a systematic and in-depth understanding of various fundamental aspects of halide perovskite semiconductors Halide Perovskite Semiconductors: Structures, Characterization, Properties, and Phenomena covers the most fundamental topics with regards to halide perovskites, including but not limited to crystal/defect theory, crystal chemistry, heterogeneity, grain boundaries, single-crystals/thin-films/nanocrystals synthesis, photophysics, solid-state ionics, spin physics, chemical (in)stability, carrier dynamics, hot carriers, surface and interfaces, lower-dimensional structures, and structural/functional characterizations. Included discussions on the fundamentals of halide perovskites aim to expand the basic science fields of physics, chemistry, and materials science. Edited by two highly qualified researchers, Halide Perovskite Semiconductors includes specific information on: Crystal/defect theory of halide perovskites, crystal chemistry of halide perovskites, and processing and microstructures of halide perovskites Single-crystals of halide perovskites, nanocrystals of halide perovskites, low-dimensional perovskite crystals, and nanoscale heterogeneity of halide perovskites Carrier mobilities and dynamics in halide perovskites, light emission of halide perovskites, photophysics and ultrafast spectroscopy of halide perovskites Hot carriers in halide perovskites, correlating photophysics with microstructures in halide perovskites, chemical stability of halide perovskites, and solid-state ionics of halide perovskites Readers can find solutions to technological issues and challenges based on the fundamental knowledge gained from this book. As such, Halide Perovskite Semiconductors is an essential in-depth treatment of the subject, ideal for solid-state chemists, materials scientists, physical chemists, inorganic chemists, physicists, and semiconductor physicists.Table of ContentsPreface xv 1 Introduction to Perovskite 1Tianwei Duan, Iván Mora-Seró, and Yuanyuan Zhou 1.1 Evolution of Perovskite 1 1.2 Structure of Perovskite 2 1.3 Property and Application of Perovskite 4 1.4 Summary and Outlook 7 2 Halide Perovskite Single Crystals 9Clara Aranda-Alonso and Michael Saliba 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Crystal Structure 9 2.3 Synthesis Methods 14 2.4 Optoelectronic Properties of Halide Perovskite Single Crystals 21 2.5 Applications 29 3 Halide Perovskite Nanocrystals 49Samrat Das Adhikari, Andrés F. Gualdrón-Reyes, and Iván Mora-Seró 3.1 Introduction 49 3.2 Methodology 51 3.3 Quantum Confinement Effect 57 3.4 Solution-processed Halide Exchange 59 3.5 Post-synthesis Defect Recovery 61 3.6 Different Shapes of the Nanocrystals 62 3.7 Doping in Perovskite Nanocrystals 64 3.8 Lead-free Perovskite Nanocrystals 69 3.9 Summary 70 4 Dimensionality Modulation in Halide Perovskites 79Akriti, Jee Yung Park, Shuchen Zhang, and Letian Dou 4.1 Classification of Low-Dimensional Perovskites 79 4.2 Synthesis and Characterization of Morphological Low-Dimensional (ABX3) Halide Perovskites 80 4.3 Synthesis and Characterization of Molecular Low-Dimensional (Non-ABX3) Halide Perovskites 83 4.4 Applications of Low-Dimensional Halide Perovskites 101 4.5 Current Challenges and Prospects of Low-Dimensional Halide 5 Halide Double Perovskites 115Carina Pareja-Rivera, Dulce Zugasti-Fernández, Paul Olalde-Velasco, and Diego Solis-Ibarra 5.1 Definition and Structure 116 5.2 Properties 118 5.3 Applications in Solar Cells and LEDs 123 5.4 Other Applications 126 5.5 Related Materials: Layered Double Perovskites and Vacancy Ordered Double Perovskites 132 5.6 Conclusions 135 6 Tin Halide Perovskite Solar Cells 147Xianyuan Jiang, Zihao Zang, and Zhijun Ning 6.1 Introduction 147 6.2 Tin Perovskite Properties 148 6.3 Perovskite Composition Engineering 151 6.4 Additives Manipulation 155 6.5 Device Architecture Engineering 156 6.6 Conclusion 158 7 Fundamentals and Synthesis Methods of Metal Halide Perovskite Thin Films 165Mingwei Hao, Tanghao Liu, Yalan Zhang, Tianwei Duan, and Yuanyuan Zhou 7.1 Introduction 165 7.2 Fundamentals of MHPs Thin Films 166 7.3 Thin Film Growth Mechanism 173 7.4 One-step Growth 180 7.5 Two-step Growth 186 7.6 Scalable Growth Methods 192 7.7 Postdeposition Treatments 200 7.8 Summary 203 8 First Principles Atomistic Theory of Halide Perovskites 215Linn Leppert 8.1 Introduction: What I Talk About When I Talk About First Principles Calculations of Halide Perovskites 215 8.2 Structural Properties 217 8.3 Optoelectronic Properties 231 8.4 Concluding Remarks: First Person Singular 242 9 Comparing the Charge Dynamics in MAPbBr3 and MAPbI3 Using Microwave Photoconductance Measurements 251Tom J. Savenije, Jiashang Zhao, and Valentina M. Caselli 9.1 Time-Resolved Microwave Conductivity 251 9.2 Global Modeling of TRMC Data 254 9.3 TRMC Measurements on MAPbI3 and MAPbBr3 255 9.4 TRMC Measurements on MAPbI3 and MAPbBr3 with Charge Selective 10 Hot Carriers in Halide Perovskites 263Jia Wei Melvin Lim, Yue Wang, and Tze Chien Sum 10.1 Introduction 263 10.2 Hot Carrier Cooling Mechanisms 265 10.3 Slow Hot Carrier Cooling in Halide Perovskites 266 10.4 Utilizing Hot Carriers in Halide Perovskites 275 10.5 Multiple Exciton Generation 280 10.6 Multiple Exciton Generation Mechanisms 283 10.7 Efficient Multiple Exciton Generation in Halide Perovskites 289 10.8 Utilizing Multiple Exciton Generation in Halide Perovskites 296 10.9 Conclusion and Outlook 299 11 Ionic Transport in Perovskite Semiconductors 305Wenke Zhou, Yicheng Zhao, and Qing Zhao 11.1 Theoretical Basis of Ionic Transport 305 11.2 Characterizations of Ionic Transport 306 11.3 Mobile Ions in Perovskite Film Under Electric Field 309 11.4 The Factors Affecting Ionic Transport in Perovskites 311 11.5 The Impact of Ionic Transport on Perovskite Films and Devices 318 11.6 Summary and Outlook 322 12 Light Emission of Halide Perovskites 329David O. Tiede, Juan F. Galisteo-López, and Hernán Míguez 12.1 Introduction 329 12.2 Charge-Carrier Recombination in Lead-Halide Perovskites 330 12.3 Photoinduced Effects on Charge Carrier Recombination 338 12.4 Lasing in Lead-Halide Perovskites 341 12.5 Conclusions 345 13 Epitaxy and Strain Engineering of Halide Perovskites 351Yang Hu, Jie Jiang, Lifu Zhang, Yunfeng Shi, and Jian Shi 13.1 Introduction 351 13.2 Epitaxy of Thin Film and Nanostructures 353 13.2.1 Epitaxial Substrates 353 13.2.2 Epitaxial Growth and Defects Formation Mechanisms 355 13.2.3 Experimental Progresses 358 13.3 Strain Engineering 360 13.3.1 Theoretical Progresses 361 13.3.2 Experimental Progresses 363 13.4 Opportunities and Challenges 365 Acknowledgments 366 References 367 14 Electron Microscopy of Perovskite Solar Cell Materials 377Mathias U. Rothmann, Wei Li, and Zhiwei Tao 14.1 Introduction 377 14.2 Fundamentals of Electron Microscopy 377 14.3 Signal Generation 379 14.4 SEM 381 14.5 Conclusions 406 15 In Situ Characterization of Halide Perovskite Synthesis 411Maged Abdelsamie, Tim Kodalle, Mriganka Singh, and Carolin M. Sutter-Fella 15.1 Introduction 411 15.2 Fundamentals of X-Ray Scattering and Fluorescence Techniques 412 15.3 In Situ Optical Spectroscopy 423 15.4 Examples of In Situ Multimodal Characterization During Solution-Based Fabrication 430 15.5 Probing Beam–Sample Interaction 435 15.6 Summary and Outlook 437 16 Multimodal Characterization of Halide Perovskites: From the Macro to the Atomic Scale 443Tiarnan A. S. Doherty and Samuel D. Stranks 16.1 Introduction 443 16.2 Early Multimodal CharacterizationWork 445 16.3 Recent Multimodal Characterization 450 16.4 Pressing Challenges and Opportunities 464 16.5 Outlook and Opportunities 471 References 475 Index 483

Read more less

Book SynopsisManaging Engineering, Procurement, Construction, and Commissioning Projects An invaluable real-world guide to managing large-scale and complex Engineering, Procurement, Construction and Commissioning (EPCC) projects Engineering, Procurement, Construction and Commissioning (EPCC) infrastructure projects require engineers from several disciplines to adhere to strict budgetary, scheduling, and performance parameters. Chemical engineers involved in EPCC projects are involved primarily in ensuring that the process plant is designed correctly and safely—interacting with the client, contributing to feasibility studies, selecting specific technologies, developing process flow diagrams, and other key tasks. Managing Engineering, Procurement, Construction, and Commissioning Projects: A Chemical Engineer’s Guide clearly defines the role of a chemical engineer in the EPCC industry and provides detailed and systematic coverage of each phase of an EPCC project. Drawing from their extensive experience in process design, optimization, and analysis, the author identifies and discuss each key task and consideration from a chemical engineer’s perspective. Topics include scope and process planning, construction support, operator training, safety and viability evaluation, and detail engineering. Provides a structured overview of the various challenges chemical engineers face in each project phase Introduces the essential aspects of the Engineering, Procurement, Construction and Commissioning industry Describes the roles of chemical process engineers in each phase of EPCC projects and in different EPCC industry positions Discusses the interaction of process engineers with other disciplines and clients Managing Engineering, Procurement, Construction, and Commissioning Projects: A Chemical Engineer’s Guide is a must-have resource for chemists in industry, process engineers, chemical Engineers, engineering consultants, and project managers and planners working on EPCC projects across the chemical Industry.Table of ContentsChapter 1 - Introduction to Engineering, Procurement, Construction and Commissioning (EPCC) Industry Chapter 2 - Roles of chemical process engineers in different phases Chapter 3 - Scope planning Chapter 4 - Process planning Chapter 5 - Safety and viability evaluation Chapter 6 - Detail Engineering Chapter 7 - Construction support Chapter 8 - Water batching Chapter 9 - Operator Training Chapter 10 - Role by process engineer's position in the industry Chapter 11 - Interaction of process engineers with other disciplines and client INDEX

Read more less

Book SynopsisElectrocatalysis for Membrane Fuel Cells Comprehensive resource covering hydrogen oxidation reaction, oxygen reduction reaction, classes of electrocatalytic materials, and characterization methods Electrocatalysis for Membrane Fuel Cells focuses on all aspects of electrocatalysis for energy applications, covering perspectives as well as the low-temperature fuel systems principles, with main emphasis on hydrogen oxidation reaction (HOR) and the oxygen reduction reaction (ORR). Following an introduction to basic principles of electrochemistry for electrocatalysis with attention to the methods to obtain the parameters crucial to characterize these systems, Electrocatalysis for Membrane Fuel Cells covers sample topics such as: Electrocatalytic materials and electrode configurations, including precious versus non-precious metal centers, stability and the role of supports for catalytic nano-objects; Fundamentals on characterization techniques of materials and the various classes of electrocatalytic materials; Theoretical explanations of materials and systems using both Density Functional Theory (DFT) and molecular modelling; Principles and methods in the analysis of fuel cells systems, fuel cells integration and subsystem design. Electrocatalysis for Membrane Fuel Cells quickly and efficiently introduces the field of electrochemistry, along with synthesis and testing in prototypes of materials, to researchers and professionals interested in renewable energy and electrocatalysis for chemical energy conversion.Table of ContentsPreface xv Part I Overview of Systems 1 1 System-level Constraints on Fuel Cell Materials and Electrocatalysts 3 Elliot Padgett and Dimitrios Papageorgopoulos 1.1 Overview of Fuel Cell Applications and System Designs 3 1.1.1 System-level Fuel Cell Metrics 3 1.1.2 Fuel Cell Subsystems and Balance of Plant (BOP) Components 5 1.1.3 Comparison of Fuel Cell Systems for Different Applications 9 1.2 Application-derived Requirements and Constraints 10 1.2.1 Fuel Cell Performance and the Heat Rejection Constraint 10 1.2.2 Startup, Flexibility, and Robustness 13 1.2.3 Fuel Cell Durability 14 1.2.4 Cost 16 1.3 Material Pathways to Improved Fuel Cells 18 1.4 Note 19 Acronyms 20 Symbols 20 References 20 2 PEM Fuel Cell Design from the Atom to the Automobile 23 Andrew Haug and Michael Yandrasits 2.1 Introduction 23 2.2 The PEMFC Catalyst 27 2.3 The Electrode 32 2.4 Membrane 38 2.5 The GDL 42 2.6 CCM and MEA 46 2.7 Flowfield and Single Fuel Cell 50 2.8 Stack and System 55 Acronyms 57 References 58 Part II Basics – Fundamentals 69 3 Electrochemical Fundamentals 71 Vito Di Noto, Gioele Pagot, Keti Vezzù, Enrico Negro, and Paolo Sgarbossa 3.1 Principles of Electrochemistry 71 3.2 The Role of the First Faraday Law 71 3.3 Electric Double Layer and the Formation of a Potential Difference at the Interface 73 3.4 The Cell 74 3.5 The Spontaneous Processes and the Nernst Equation 75 3.6 Representation of an Electrochemical Cell and the Nernst Equation 77 3.7 The Electrochemical Series 79 3.8 Dependence of the E cell on Temperature and Pressure 82 3.9 Thermodynamic Efficiencies 83 3.10 Case Study – The Impact of Thermodynamics on the Corrosion of Low-T FC Electrodes 85 3.11 Reaction Kinetics and Fuel Cells 88 3.11.1 Correlation Between Current and Reaction Kinetics 88 3.11.2 The Concept of Exchange Current 89 3.12 Charge Transfer Theory Based on Distribution of Energy States 89 3.12.1 The Butler–Volmer Equation 96 3.12.2 The Tafel Equation 100 3.12.3 Interplay Between Exchange Current and Electrocatalyst Activity 101 3.13 Conclusions 103 Acronyms 104 Symbols 104 References 107 4 Quantifying the Kinetic Parameters of Fuel Cell Reactions 111 Viktoriia A. Saveleva, Juan Herranz, and Thomas J. Schmidt 4.1 Introduction 111 4.2 Electrochemical Active Surface Area (ECSA) Determination 114 4.2.1 ECSA Determination Using Underpotential Deposition 115 4.2.1.1 Hydrogen Underpotential Deposition (H UPD) 116 4.2.1.2 Copper Underpotential Deposition (Cu UPD) 117 4.2.2 ECSA Quantification Based on the Adsorption of Probe Molecules 118 4.2.2.1 CO Stripping 118 4.2.2.2 No –2 ∕NO Sorption 119 4.2.3 Double-layer Capacitance Measurements and Other Methods 120 4.2.4 ECSA Measurements in a PEFC: Which Method to Choose? 120 4.3 H 2 -Oxidation and Electrochemical Setups for the Quantification of Kinetic Parameters 121 4.3.1 Rotating Disc Electrodes (RDEs) 122 4.3.2 Hydrogen Pump (PEFC) Approach 124 4.3.3 Ultramicroelectrode Approach 125 4.3.4 Scanning Electrochemical Microscopy (SECM) Approach 125 4.3.5 Floating Electrode Method 127 4.3.6 Methods Summary 128 4.4 ORR Kinetics 129 4.4.1 ORR Mechanism Studies with RRDE Setups 129 4.4.2 ORR Pathway on Me/N/C ORR Catalysts 130 4.4.3 ORR Kinetics: Methods 132 4.4.3.1 Pt-based Electrodes 132 4.4.3.2 Pt-free Catalysts: RDE vs. PEFC Kinetic Studies 133 4.5 Concluding Remarks 133 Acronyms 134 Symbols 134 References 135 5 Adverse and Beneficial Functions of Surface Layers Formed on Fuel Cell Electrocatalysts 149 Shimshon Gottesfeld 5.1 Introduction 149 5.2 Catalyst Capping in Heterogeneous Catalysis and in Electrocatalysis 151 5.3 Passivation of PGM/TM and Non-PGM HOR Catalysts and Its Possible Prevention 156 5.4 Literature Reports on Fuel Cell Catalyst Protection by Capping 161 5.4.1 Protection of ORR Pt catalysts Against Agglomeration by an Ultrathin Overlayer of Mesoporous SiO 2 or Me–SiO 2 161 5.4.2 Protection by Carbon Caps Against Catalyst Detachment and Catalyst Passivation Under Ambient Conditions 162 5.5 Other Means for Improving the Performance Stability of Supported Electrocatalysts 166 5.5.1 Replacement of Carbon Supports by Ceramic Supports 166 5.5.2 Protection of Pt Catalysts by Enclosure in Mesopores 167 5.6 Conclusions 170 Abbreviations 171 References 171 Part III State of the Art 175 6 Design of PGM-free ORR Catalysts: From Molecular to the State of the Art 177 Naomi Levy and Lior Elbaz 6.1 Introduction 177 6.2 The Influence of Molecular Changes Within the Complex 179 6.2.1 The Role of the Metal Center 179 6.2.2 Addition of Substituents to MCs 183 6.2.2.1 Beta-substituents 184 6.2.3 Meso-substituents 186 6.2.4 Axial Ligands 187 6.3 Cooperative Effects Between Neighboring MCs 190 6.3.1 Bimetallic Cofacial Complexes – “Packman” Complexes 191 6.3.2 MC Polymers 191 6.4 The Physical and/or Chemical Interactions Between the Catalyst and Its Support Material 193 6.5 Effect of Pyrolysis 194 Acronyms 196 References 196 7 Recent Advances in Electrocatalysts for Hydrogen Oxidation Reaction in Alkaline Electrolytes 205 Indra N. Pulidindi and Meital Shviro 7.1 Introduction 205 7.2 Mechanism of the HOR in Alkaline Media 206 7.3 Electrocatalysts for Alkaline HOR 212 7.3.1 Platinum Group Metal HOR Electrocatalysts 212 7.3.2 Non-platinum Group Metal-based HOR Electrocatalysts 214 7.4 Conclusions 220 Acronyms 221 References 221 8 Membranes for Fuel Cells 227 Paolo Sgarbossa, Giovanni Crivellaro, Francesco Lanero, Gioele Pagot, Afaaf R. Alvi, Enrico Negro, Keti Vezzù, and Vito Di Noto 8.1 Introduction 227 8.2 Properties of the PE separators 228 8.2.1 Benchmarking of IEMs 229 8.2.2 Ion-exchange Capacity (IEC) 229 8.2.3 Water Uptake (WU), Swelling Ratio (SR), and Water Transport 231 8.2.4 Ionic Conductivity (σ) 233 8.2.5 Gas Permeability 234 8.2.6 Chemical Stability 235 8.2.7 Thermal and Mechanical Stability 237 8.2.8 Cost of the IEMs 239 8.3 Classification of Ion-exchange Membranes 240 8.3.1 Cation-exchange Membranes (CEMs) 240 8.3.1.1 Perfluorinated Membranes 240 8.3.1.2 Nonperfluorinated Membranes 245 8.3.2 Anion-exchange Membranes (AEMs) 246 8.3.2.1 Functionalized Polyketones 247 8.3.2.2 Poly(Vinyl Benzyl Trimethyl Ammonium) (PVBTMA) Polymers 248 8.3.2.3 Poly(sulfones) (PS) 249 8.3.3 Hybrid Ion-exchange Membranes 249 8.3.3.1 Hybrid Membranes with Single Ceramic Oxoclusters [P/(M X O Y) n ] 250 8.3.3.2 Hybrid Membranes Comprising Surface-functionalized Nanofillers 254 8.3.3.3 Hybrid Membranes Doped with hierarchical “Core–Shell” Nanofillers 254 8.3.4 Porous Membranes 257 8.3.4.1 Porous Membranes as Host Material 257 8.3.4.2 Porous Membranes as Support Layer 258 8.3.4.3 Porous Membranes as Unconventional Separators 259 8.4 Mechanism of Ion Conduction 259 8.5 Summary and Perspectives 268 Acronyms 271 Symbols 272 References 272 9 Supports for Oxygen Reduction Catalysts: Understanding and Improving Structure, Stability, and Activity 287 Iwona A. Rutkowska, Sylwia Zoladek, and Pawel J. Kulesza 9.1 Introduction 287 9.2 Carbon Black Supports 288 9.3 Decoration and Modification with Metal Oxide Nanostructures 289 9.4 Carbon Nanotube as Carriers 291 9.5 Doping, Modification, and Other Carbon Supports 293 9.6 Graphene as Catalytic Component 293 9.7 Metal Oxide-containing ORR Catalysts 296 9.8 Photodeposition of Pt on Various Oxide–Carbon Composites 299 9.9 Other Supports 301 9.10 Alkaline Medium 302 9.11 Toward More Complex Hybrid Systems 303 9.12 Stabilization Approaches 306 9.13 Conclusions and Perspectives 307 Acknowledgment 308 Acronyms 308 References 308 Part IV Physical–Chemical Characterization 319 10 Understanding the Electrocatalytic Reaction in the Fuel Cell by Tracking the Dynamics of the Catalyst by X-ray Absorption Spectroscopy 321 Ditty Dixon, Aiswarya Bhaskar, and Aswathi Thottungal 10.1 Introduction 321 10.2 A Short Introduction to XAS 323 10.3 Application of XAS in Electrocatalysis 325 10.3.1 Ex Situ Characterization of Electrocatalyst 325 10.3.2 Operando XAS Studies 330 10.4 Δμ XANES Analysis to Track Adsorbate 334 10.5 Time-resolved Operando XAS Measurements in Fuel Cells 338 10.6 Fourth-generation Synchrotron Facilities and Advanced Characterization Techniques 340 10.6.1 Total-reflection Fluorescence X-ray Absorption Spectroscopy 341 10.6.2 Resonant X-ray Emission Spectroscopy (RXES) 341 10.6.3 Combined XRD and XAS 342 10.7 Conclusions 342 Acronyms 343 References 344 Part V Modeling 349 11 Unraveling Local Electrocatalytic Conditions with Theory and Computation 351 Jun Huang, Mohammad J. Eslamibidgoli, and Michael H. Eikerling 11.1 Local Reaction Conditions: Why Bother? 351 11.2 From Electrochemical Cells to Interfaces: Basic Concepts 352 11.3 Characteristics of Electrocatalytic Interfaces 355 11.4 Multifaceted Effects of Surface Charging on the Local Reaction Conditions 356 11.5 The Challenges in Modeling Electrified Interfaces using First-principles Methods 358 11.5.1 Computational Hydrogen Electrode 359 11.5.2 Unit-cell Extrapolation, Explicit Solvated Protons, and Excess Electrons 360 11.5.3 Counter Charge and Reference Electrode 361 11.5.4 Effective Screening Medium and mPB Theory 361 11.5.5 Grand-canonical DFT 362 11.6 A Concerted Theoretical–Computational Framework 362 11.7 Case Study: Oxygen Reduction at Pt(111) 364 11.8 Outlook 367 Acronyms 367 Symbols 368 References 368 Part VI Protocols 375 12 Quantifying the Activity of Electrocatalysts 377 Karla Vega-Granados and Nicolas Alonso-Vante 12.1 Introduction: Toward a Systematic Protocol for Activity Measurements 377 12.2 Materials Consideration 378 12.2.1 PGM Group 378 12.2.2 Low PGM and PGM-free Approaches 379 12.2.3 Impact of Support Effects on Catalytic Sites 381 12.3 Electrochemical Cell Considerations 382 12.3.1 Cell Configuration and Material 382 12.3.2 Electrolyte 385 12.3.2.1 Purity 385 12.3.2.2 Protons vs. Hydroxide Ions 386 12.3.2.3 Influence of Counterions 388 12.3.3 Electrode Potential Measurements 388 12.3.4 Preparation of Electrodes 391 12.3.5 Well-defined and Nanoparticulated Objects 395 12.4 Parameters Diagnostic of Electrochemical Performance 396 12.4.1 Surface Area 396 12.4.2 Hydrogen Underpotential Deposition Integration 397 12.4.2.1 Surface Oxide Reduction 398 12.4.2.2 CO Monolayer Oxidation (CO Stripping) 400 12.4.2.3 Underpotential Deposition of Metals 401 12.4.2.4 Double-layer Capacitance 402 12.4.3 Electrocatalysts Site Density 402 12.4.4 Data Evaluation (Half-Cell Reactions) 404 12.4.5 The E 1/2 and E (j Pt (5%)) Parameters 405 12.5 Stability Tests 407 12.6 Data Evaluation (Auxiliary Techniques) 409 12.6.1 Surface Atoms vs. Bulk 410 12.7 Conclusions 411 Acknowledgments 412 Acronyms 412 Symbols 413 References 414 13 Durability of Fuel Cell Electrocatalysts and Methods for Performance Assessment 429 Bianca M. Ceballos and Piotr Zelenay 13.1 Introduction 429 13.2 Fuel Cell PGM-free Electrocatalysts for Low-temperature Applications 431 13.3 PGM-free Electrocatalyst Degradation Pathways 432 13.3.1 Demetallation 432 13.3.2 Carbon Oxidation 436 13.3.3 Micropore Flooding 439 13.3.4 Nitrogen Protonation and Anionic Adsorption 439 13.4 PGM-free Electrocatalyst Durability and Metrics 440 13.4.1 Performance and Durability Evaluation in Air-supplied Fuel Cell Cathode 440 13.4.2 Assessment of Carbon Corrosion in Nitrogen-purged Cathode 443 13.4.3 Determination of Performance Loss upon Cycling Cathode Catalyst in Nitrogen 443 13.4.4 Recommendations for ORR Electrocatalyst Evaluation in RRDE in O 2 and in an Inert Gas 446 13.4.5 Electrocatalyst Corrosion 447 13.5 Low-PGM Catalyst Degradation 447 13.5.1 Pt Dissolution 449 13.5.2 Carbon Support Corrosion 452 13.5.3 Pt Catalyst MEA Activity Assessment and Durability 454 13.5.4 PGM Electrocatalyst MEA Conditioning in H 2 /Air 454 13.5.5 Accelerated Stress Test of PGM Electrocatalyst Durability 456 13.6 Conclusion 457 Acronyms 459 References 460 Part VII Systems 471 14 Modeling of Polymer Electrolyte Membrane Fuel Cells 473 Andrea Baricci, Andrea Casalegno, Dario Maggiolo, Federico Moro, Matteo Zago, and Massimo Guarnieri 14.1 Introduction 473 14.2 General Equations for PEMFC Models 474 14.2.1 Analytical and Numerical Modeling 474 14.2.2 Reversible Electromotive Force 476 14.2.3 Fuel Cell Voltage 477 14.2.4 Activation Overpotential 478 14.2.5 Ohmic Overpotential – PEM Model 479 14.2.6 Concentration Overpotential 480 14.2.7 Examples of Fuel Cell Modeling 482 14.3 Multiphase Water Transport Model for PEMFCs 483 14.4 Fluid Mechanics in PEMFC Porous Media: From 3D Simulations to 1D Models 488 14.4.1 From Micro- to Macroscopic Models 490 14.4.2 Porous Medium Anisotropy 491 14.4.3 Fluid–Fluid Viscous Drag 492 14.4.4 Surface Tension and Capillary Pressure 492 14.5 Physical-based Modeling for Electrochemical Impedance Spectroscopy 496 14.5.1 Experimental Measurement and Modeling Approaches 496 14.5.2 Physical-based Modeling 497 14.5.2.1 Current Relaxation 497 14.5.2.2 Laplace Transform 498 14.5.3 Typical Impedance Features of PEMFC 498 14.5.4 Application of EIS Modeling to PEMFC Diagnostic 500 14.5.5 Approximations of 1D Approach 501 14.6 Conclusions and Perspectives 502 Acronyms 503 Symbols 504 References 507 15 Physics-based Modeling of Polymer Electrolyte Membrane Fuel Cells: From Cell to Automotive Systems 511 Andrea Baricci, Matteo Zago, Simone Buso, Marco Sorrentino, and Andrea Casalegno 15.1 Polymer Fuel Cell Model for Stack Simulation 511 15.1.1 General Characteristics of a Fuel Cell System for Automotive Applications 511 15.1.2 Analysis of the Channel Geometry for Stack Performance Modeling 514 15.1.3 Analysis of the Air and Hydrogen Utilization for Stack Performance Modeling 516 15.1.4 Introduction to Transient Stack Models 518 15.2 Auxiliary Subsystems Modeling 519 15.2.1 Air Management Subsystem 519 15.2.2 Hydrogen Management Subsystem 521 15.2.3 Thermal Management Subsystem 522 15.2.4 PEMFC System Simulation 522 15.3 Electronic Power Converters for Fuel Cell-powered Vehicles 525 15.3.1 Power Converter Architecture 527 15.3.2 Load Adaptability 527 15.3.3 Power Electronic System Components 528 15.3.3.1 Port Interface Converters 530 15.3.3.2 The PEMFC Interface Converter 530 15.3.3.3 The Motor Interface Converter 530 15.3.3.4 The Energy Storage Interface 531 15.3.3.5 Supervisory Control 531 15.4 Fuel Cell Powertrains for Mobility Use 532 15.4.1 Transport Application Scenarios 532 15.4.2 Tools for the Codesign of Transport Fuel Cell Systems and Energy Management Strategies 534 15.4.2.1 Automotive Case Study: Optimal Codesign of an LDV FCHV Powertrain 535 Acronyms 540 Symbols 541 References 541 Index 545

Read more less